Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration ...................................................................

1-1
1.1 Basic Concepts ...................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Configuration Procedures .............................................................. 1-2
1.1.2 Principle and Cautions ................................................................... 1-3
1.2 V5 Trunk Configuration .......................................................................... 1-7
1.3 V5-Interface Configuration ..................................................................... 1-11
1.4 V5 User Configuration ............................................................................ 1-17
1.5 Examples................................................................................................ 1-19
1.5.1 Adding SM V5 DSL Users .............................................................. 1-19
1.5.2 Adding SPM V5 Users ................................................................... 1-26
1.5.3 Adding a V5-Interface .................................................................... 1-35
1.5.4 Deleting a V5-Interface .................................................................. 1-40
Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration ................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Basic Concepts ...................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 Configuration Procedures .............................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Configuration Principles and Cautions ........................................... 2-2
2.2 PRA Subscriber Configuration ............................................................... 2-5
2.3 PRA Link Configuration .......................................................................... 2-7
2.4 PRA Trunk Group Configuration ............................................................ 2-9
2.5 PRA Trunk Circuit Configuration ............................................................ 2-12
2.6 PCM Port Configuration ......................................................................... 2-13
2.7 Examples................................................................................................ 2-14
2.7.1 Configuring SM PRA Trunk Data ................................................... 2-14
2.7.2 Configuring SPM PRA Trunk Data ................................................. 2-23
2.7.3 Adding PRA Trunk Data ................................................................. 2-34
2.7.4 Modifying PRA Trunk Data ............................................................ 2-40
2.7.5 Removing PRA Trunk Data............................................................ 2-45
2.7.6 Modifying PRA Subscriber Number ............................................... 2-48
Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration .................................................. 3-1
3.1 Basic Concepts ...................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Configuration Procedures .............................................................. 3-1
3.1.2 Configuration Principles and Cautions ........................................... 3-2
3.2 DP Data Configuration ........................................................................... 3-7
3.3 SCP Data Configuration ......................................................................... 3-11
3.4 SCCP Data Configuration ...................................................................... 3-13
3.5 Resource Data Configuration ................................................................. 3-18
3.6 Charging Data Configuration .................................................................. 3-21
3.7 Other Data Configuration ....................................................................... 3-27
3.8 Examples................................................................................................ 3-30
 3.8.1 Configuring IN Data ....................................................................... 3-30
3.8.2 Configuring INAP Signaling Link Data ........................................... 3-41
3.8.3 Configuring Intelligent Card Service .............................................. 3-46
3.8.4 Modifying Charging Data ............................................................... 3-49
3.8.5 Configuring NP Incoming Call Service ........................................... 3-54
3.8.6 Configuring NP Outgoing Call Service ........................................... 3-57
Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples ....................................................... 4-1
4.1 Preset Conditions ................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Hardware Configuration ......................................................................... 4-3
4.2.1 Hardware Data ............................................................................... 4-3
4.2.2 Configuration Commands .............................................................. 4-7
4.3 Charging Data Configuration .................................................................. 4-16
4.3.1 Charging Data ................................................................................ 4-16
4.3.2 Configuration Commands .............................................................. 4-19
4.4 Trunk Data Configuration ....................................................................... 4-22
4.4.1 Trunk Data ..................................................................................... 4-22
4.4.2 Configuration Commands .............................................................. 4-24
4.5 Call Prefix Data Configuration ................................................................ 4-31
4.5.1 Call Prefix Data .............................................................................. 4-31
4.5.2 Configuration Commands .............................................................. 4-33
4.6 Subscriber Data Configuration ............................................................... 4-33
4.6.1 Subscriber Data ............................................................................. 4-33
4.6.2 Configuration Commands .............................................................. 4-34
4.7 V5 Data Configuration ............................................................................ 4-35
4.7.1 V5 Data .......................................................................................... 4-35
4.7.2 Configuration Commands .............................................................. 4-37
4.8 PRA Data Configuration ......................................................................... 4-38
4.8.1 PRA Data ....................................................................................... 4-38
4.8.2 Configuration Commands .............................................................. 4-39
4.9 IN Data Configuration ............................................................................. 4-41
4.9.1 IN Service Data .............................................................................. 4-41
4.9.2 Configuration Commands .............................................................. 4-42
Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration .............................................................. 5-1
5.1 Configuration Procedures ....................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1 NE Management ............................................................................ 5-2
5.1.2 Equipment management ................................................................ 5-3
5.1.3 Downstream Equipment Registration ............................................ 5-7
5.1.4 NMS Parameters Configuration ..................................................... 5-10
5.1.5 Service Data Configuration ............................................................ 5-13
 5.1.6 Loading and Backing Up ................................................................ 5-18
5.1.7 Performance Management ............................................................ 5-20
5.1.8 Alarm Management........................................................................ 5-20
5.2 Configuring Inband NMS of BSL ............................................................ 5-21
Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples ....................................................... 6-1
6.1 Networking Descriptions ......................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Configurations ........................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.1 Configuring BTU ............................................................................ 6-4
6.2.2 Configuring Inband NMS of BSL .................................................... 6-7
Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations .................................................... A-1

Index .................................................................................................................
HUAWEI

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System

Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume

OVSV610R103
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System
Operation Manual

Volume Services & Examples Volume

Manual Version T2-011693-20041130-C-4.10

Product Version OVSV610R103

BOM 31160793

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support
and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,

Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China

Postal Code: 518129

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]
Copyright © 2004 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any

means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co.,
Ltd.

All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
About This Manual

Release Notes

The product version that corresponds to the manual is C&C08 Digital SPC Switching
System OVSV610R103.

Related Manuals

The following manuals provide more information about the C&C08 Digital SPC
Switching System.

Manual Content
It consists of two volumes. The Troubleshooting Volume
details on how to locate and process common faults in the
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System, while the Routine
Maintenance Manual Maintenance Volume offers operational methods and
maintenance suggestions for routine maintenance and
special maintenance.

It offers an overall introduction to the C&C08 Digital SPC

C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System
Switching System, including the system structure, hardware
Technical Manual
functions, software functions, services and applications.
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching It is used for assisting the users in data configurations and
System Operation Manual typical applications.
It provides information for the system installation, including
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System
the installation of the cabinets, cables, power system and
Installation Manual
various boards.
It introduces almost all the boards available in the C&C08
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Digital SPC Switching System. For each board, it describes
Board Manual its functions, features, interface signal, functional principle
and technical Indexes.

Organization

The manual describes the configuration of the special services of the C&C08 Digital
SPC Switching System.

There are four chapters and an appendix in the manual.

 Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration focuses on the basic concepts, procedures,
commands and examples of the configuration of the V5 data, including the V5 trunk,
V5-interface and V5 user.

Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration covers the procedures, principles, cautions,

commands and examples of the configuration of the PRA data, including PRA
subscriber, PRA link, PRA trunk group, PRA trunk circuit and PCM port data.

Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration elaborates on the procedures, principles,

cautions, commands and examples of the configuration of the intelligent service data,
including the DP data, SCP data, SCCP data, resource data and charging data.

Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples offers a comprehensive example and

consists of eight parts, namely, hardware configuration, charging data configuration,
trunk data configuration, call prefix data configuration, subscriber data configuration,
V5 data configuration, PRA data configuration and IN data configuration.

Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration offers the procedures for BTU board
configuration.

Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples offers examples for how to configure BTU.

Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations collects the acronyms and abbreviations

used in the manual.

Intended Audience

The manual is intended for the following readers:

z Engineers & technicians
z Operation & maintenance personnel

Conventions

The manual uses the following conventions:

I. General conventions

Convention Description
Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Arial Narrow Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.
Boldface Headings are in Boldface.
Courier New Terminal Display is in Courier New.
II. Command conventions

Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.
italic Command arguments are in italic.
[] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.

III. Symbols

Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of
special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:

Caution: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.

Note: Means a complementary description.

Operation Manual - Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration ................................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 Basic Concepts .................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 Configuration Procedures ....................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 Principle and Cautions ............................................................................................ 1-3
1.2 V5 Trunk Configuration...................................................................................................... 1-7
1.3 V5-Interface Configuration............................................................................................... 1-10
1.4 V5 User Configuration ..................................................................................................... 1-16
1.5 Examples ......................................................................................................................... 1-18
1.5.1 Adding SM V5 DSL Users..................................................................................... 1-18
1.5.2 Adding SPM V5 Users .......................................................................................... 1-25
1.5.3 Adding a V5-Interface ........................................................................................... 1-34
1.5.4 Deleting a V5-Interface ......................................................................................... 1-39

Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration.............................................................................................. 2-1

2.1 Basic Concepts .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 Configuration Procedures ....................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.2 Configuration Principles and Cautions.................................................................... 2-2
2.2 PRA Subscriber Configuration........................................................................................... 2-5
2.3 PRA Link Configuration ..................................................................................................... 2-7
2.4 PRA Trunk Group Configuration........................................................................................ 2-9
2.5 PRA Trunk Circuit Configuration...................................................................................... 2-12
2.6 PCM Port Configuration................................................................................................... 2-13
2.7 Examples ......................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.7.1 Configuring SM PRA Trunk Data .......................................................................... 2-14
2.7.2 Configuring SPM PRA Trunk Data........................................................................ 2-23
2.7.3 Adding PRA Trunk Data........................................................................................ 2-34
2.7.4 Modifying PRA Trunk Data.................................................................................... 2-40
2.7.5 Removing PRA Trunk Data................................................................................... 2-45
2.7.6 Modifying PRA Subscriber Number ...................................................................... 2-48

Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration ............................................................................... 3-1

3.1 Basic Concepts .................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Configuration Procedures ....................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Configuration Principles and Cautions.................................................................... 3-2
3.2 DP Data Configuration....................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3 SCP Data Configuration .................................................................................................. 3-11
3.4 SCCP Data Configuration................................................................................................ 3-13
3.5 Resource Data Configuration .......................................................................................... 3-18
3.6 Charging Data Configuration ........................................................................................... 3-21

i
Operation Manual - Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

3.7 Other Data Configuration................................................................................................. 3-27

3.8 Examples ......................................................................................................................... 3-30
3.8.1 Configuring IN Data............................................................................................... 3-30
3.8.2 Configuring INAP Signaling Link Data .................................................................. 3-41
3.8.3 Configuring Intelligent Card Service...................................................................... 3-46
3.8.4 Modifying Charging Data....................................................................................... 3-49
3.8.5 Configuring NP Incoming Call Service .................................................................. 3-54
3.8.6 Configuring NP Outgoing Call Service .................................................................. 3-57

Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples..................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Preset Conditions............................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Hardware Configuration..................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.1 Hardware Data ........................................................................................................ 4-3
4.2.2 Configuration Commands ....................................................................................... 4-7
4.3 Charging Data Configuration ........................................................................................... 4-16
4.3.1 Charging Data ....................................................................................................... 4-16
4.3.2 Configuration Commands ..................................................................................... 4-19
4.4 Trunk Data Configuration................................................................................................. 4-22
4.4.1 Trunk Data............................................................................................................. 4-22
4.4.2 Configuration Commands ..................................................................................... 4-24
4.5 Call Prefix Data Configuration ......................................................................................... 4-31
4.5.1 Call Prefix Data ..................................................................................................... 4-31
4.5.2 Configuration Commands ..................................................................................... 4-33
4.6 Subscriber Data Configuration......................................................................................... 4-33
4.6.1 Subscriber Data..................................................................................................... 4-33
4.6.2 Configuration Commands ..................................................................................... 4-34
4.7 V5 Data Configuration ..................................................................................................... 4-35
4.7.1 V5 Data ................................................................................................................. 4-35
4.7.2 Configuration Commands ..................................................................................... 4-36
4.8 PRA Data Configuration .................................................................................................. 4-37
4.8.1 PRA Data .............................................................................................................. 4-37
4.8.2 Configuration Commands ..................................................................................... 4-38
4.9 IN Data Configuration ...................................................................................................... 4-40
4.9.1 IN Service Data ..................................................................................................... 4-40
4.9.2 Configuration Commands ..................................................................................... 4-41

Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration ........................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Configuration Procedures .................................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1 NE Management ..................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Equipment management ......................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.3 Downstream Equipment Registration ..................................................................... 5-7
5.1.4 NMS Parameters Configuration ............................................................................ 5-10
5.1.5 Service Data Configuration ................................................................................... 5-13
5.1.6 Loading and Backing Up ....................................................................................... 5-18

ii
Operation Manual - Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Table of Contents

5.1.7 Performance Management.................................................................................... 5-20

5.1.8 Alarm Management............................................................................................... 5-20
5.2 Configuring Inband NMS of BSL...................................................................................... 5-21

Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples ..................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Networking Descriptions .................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Configurations.................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.1 Configuring BTU...................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 Configuring Inband NMS of BSL ............................................................................. 6-7

Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations .................................................................................A-1

iii
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

1.1 Basic Concepts

The setup of a V5-interface is a process of cooperation between the Local Exchange

(LE) and an Access Network (AN). The V5-interface configuration at the LE side
should be in compliance with that at the AN side. The V5-interface at both sides
should have the same V5-interface Identification (ID), link ID, logical C-channel ID
and V5 variable. Moreover, the physical C-channel and logical C-channel should be
configured in the same link time slot.

The V5.1-interface comprises a 2.048 Mbit/s link that supports the following access
types.
z Analog telephone access
z 64 kbit/s-oriented Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) basic access
z Other analog or digital accesses for semi-permanent connections without
out-band signaling information
These access types are provided with specified bearer channel allocation but without
concentration capability within the AN.

The V5.2-interface comprises one to sixteen 2.048 Mbit/s links as required. It

supports both the access types supported by the V5.1-interface and the ISDN primary
rate access. The access types supported by the V5.2-interface are allocated with
flexible call-oriented bearer channels. They provide concentration capability within the
AN and over the V5.2-interface.

There are five Layer 3 protocols within the V5.2-interface.

z Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) protocol
z Control protocol
z Link control protocol
z Bearer Channel Connection (BCC) protocol
z Protection protocol
The V5.1-interface supports only PSTN protocol and Control protocol. When
configuring a V5-interface, therefore, specify the communication channel that carries
these protocols.

A number of concepts related to the communication channel are explained as follows.

z Communication path (C-path): It is a layer 2 data link on the V5-interface that
carries one of such protocols as Control protocol, Link control protocol, PSTN

1-1
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

protocol, Protection protocol and BCC protocol, or signaling data, packet data
and frame relay data from the ISDN D channel.
z Physical C-channel: It is a 64 kbit/s time slot on a V5.2-interface which has been
assigned for carrying logical C-channels.
z Logical C-channel: It is a group of one or more C-paths, all of different types, but
excluding the C-path for the protection protocol.
z Active C-channel: It is a physical C-channel which is currently carrying a logical
C-channel. An active C-channel becomes a standby C-channel when it is not
carrying a logical C-channel.
z Standby C-channel: It is a physical C-channel which is not carrying a logical
C-channel, but is used for the protection of logical C-channels. Once it is used to
carry a logical C-channel, a standby C-channel becomes an active C-channel.
z Primary link: It is a 2.048 Mbit/s link in a multi-link V5.2-interface whose physical
C-channel in the time slot 16 carries a C-path for the protection protocol and, on
V5.2 initialization, also the C-path for the control protocol, link control protocol,
and the BCC protocol. Other C-paths may also be carried in the time slot 16.
z Secondary link: It is a 2.048 Mbit/s link in a multi-link V5.2-interface whose time
slot 16 carries a C-path for the protection protocol and, on V5.2 initialization, acts
as the standby C-channel for the control protocol, link control protocol, and BCC
protocol and any other C-paths initially carried in the time slot 16 of the primary
link.
z Protection group 1: It is set up to protect C-channels of the primary link and
secondary link to provide protection for the primary link.
z Protection group 2: It is set up to protect C-channels in the primary link and
secondary link to provide protection for the communication link. The field value is
protection group 1 if no special claim.

1.1.1 Configuration Procedures

The V5 data configuration includes the addition, removal and modification of related
data. The V5 data involves call source, V5 trunk data, V5-interface data and V5 user
data. There are restriction and hierarchy between various V5 data. The V5 data
should be configured in sequence based on the restriction relationship so as to
maintain the consistence and security of the database, enhance the association, and
reduce the data redundancy. Figure 1-1 shows the restriction relationship between
the V5 data.

1-2
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

V5 user

V5-interface

V5 trunk circuit Number segment

V5 trunk group

Call source

Figure 1-1 Restriction relationship between the V5 data

The contents in the figure indicate the object whose data is to be set, and the
connecting line indicates a reference relationship. The data of a lower position is to be
referenced by the data of an upper position. The relationship shows that an addition or
modification of the data should be in the ascending order and a removal of the data
should be in the descending order.

1.1.2 Principle and Cautions

I. Principle

z C-channel configuration
A C-channel can only be configured in time slots 16, 15 and 31. Only when all time
slots 16 are occupied, can time slot 15 be applied, then time slot 31.

If the V5.1-interface supports only PSTN user port, two C-channels will be allocated
by provisioning.

If the V5.1-interface supports either ISDN user port or ISDN and PSTN user port,
three C-channels will be allocated by provisioning.

If only one communication channel is allocated, it is the time slot 16 (C-channel 1).

If two communication channels are allocated, they are the time slots 16 and 15
(respectively C-channel 1 and C-channel 2).

If three communication channels are allocated, they are the time slots 16, 15 and 31
(respectively C-channel 1, C-channel 2 and C-channel 3).

In the case of only one 2.048 Mbit/s link in the V5.2-interface, the time slot allocation
for the physical C-channels shall be the same as that for the physical C-channels in
the V5.1-interface. This is to ensure the full compatibility with V5.1.

In the case of more than one 2.048 Mkbit/s links forming a V5.2-interface, then the
protection protocol shall be used. In this case, the time slot 16 of the primary link will
contain the protection protocol and any C-path which has been provisioned to be

1-3
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

within the same C-channel. The time slot 16 of the secondary link will also contain the
protection protocol.

Further physical C-channels should preferably be allocated in the following sequence:

1) Time slots 16 of the remaining 2.048 Mbit/s links shall be allocated as required. If
more are required, then
2) Time slot 15 of a 2.048 Mbit/s link shall be allocated. If still more are required,
then
3) Time slot 31 of the same 2.048 Mbit/s link shall be allocated. If still more are
required, then
4) Continue the allocation by allocating the time slot 15 and then 31 of the next
2.048 Mbit/s link as indicated in the description above. This process may be
repeated until all time slots 15 and 31 on all 2.048 Mbit/s links have been
allocated.
For V5.2-interfaces of 16 links, a maximum of 48 physical C-channels may be
allocated theoretically.
z Setup of primary and secondary links
The primary link is a 2.048 Mbit/s link in a multi-link V5.2-interface. Its physical
C-channel in the time slot 16 carries such protocols as protection protocol, control
protocol, link control protocol and BCC protocol. The secondary link is a 2.048 Mbit/s
link which acts as the standby C-channel for the primary link, and is allocated in the
time slot 16. It carries only the protection protocol.

The PSTN protocol, ISDN Ds (Digital Subscriber Signaling System 1), ISDN P and
ISDN F (frame relay) can be carried in the primary link. In this case, the time slots 16
of primary and secondary links form the protection group 1, and the secondary links
provide protection. The above protocols also may be carried in physical C-channels of
non-primary link or non-secondary link. These physical C-channels form the
protection group 2, providing the communication link with protection. Only the standby
physical C-channel with the protection group 2 provisioned can be protected, but at
most three standby physical C-channels can be protected.
z Setup of the physical C-channel of the primary link
The physical C-channel of the primary link can only be set up in the time slot 16. The
circuit number of a physical C-channel must be unique except that the circuit number
of the PSTN physical C-channel can be the same as that of the C-channel of the
primary link. Similarly, the High-level Data Link Control (HDLC) numbers of physical
C-channels cannot be the same.

II. Cautions

z Determination of the number of V5-interfaces and that of user numbers in the

interfaces

1-4
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

In the case of V5-interface interconnections, the V5-interface is mainly of the V5.2

type. Each V5-interface can be configured with sixteen 2.048 Mbit/s links at most. If
there are more than 16 links, a V5-interface should be added. If a V5-interface is
configured with sixteen 2.048 Mbit/s links, suppose the trunk user convergence ratio
is 1:5, so each V5-interface can connect about 2 500 V5 users at most. Therefore, if
the convergence ratio 1:5, and there are more than 2 500 V5 users, another
V5-interface should be added. If the convergence ratio increases, the number of
users connected to a V5-interface will also increase.
z Planning of V5-interface links
The 2.048 Mbit/s links of a V5-interface should be configured in a module, instead of
in several modules. When planning, the active and standby signaling links in an
interface should be allocated to different slots of the V5 Trunk Processing Board
(V5TK)/16-Channel E1/T1 Interface Board (ET16) and V5 Protocol Processing Board
(LPV5)/Central Processing Unit (CPC). If a multi-SM exchange (SM stands for
Switching Module) is connected to an AN through multiple V5-interfaces, allocate the
planned V5-interfaces to different modules as possible.
z Data needed to be negotiated in the V5 interconnection between the LE and an
AN
V5-interface related data to be configured includes V5-interface data, V5
communication channel data, V5 link data and user port data. The data needed to be
negotiated between the LE and an AN includes the following.
z User data: L3 protocol address (PSTN user port), Envelope Function (EF)
protocol address (ISDN user port)
z Interface data: V5-interface ID, V5 variable, logical C-channel ID
z 2.048 Mbit/s link data: V5 link ID, circuit number of the primary/secondary
link
According to the above, the specific negotiated contents include the following.
z V5-interface ID
z V5 link ID
z V5 protocol type carried on the physical C-channel
z Port address (L3 protocol address/EF protocol address)
z Protection group (protection group 1 or protection group 2)
z Logical C-channel ID
z V5 variable
z Circuit number of the primary/secondary link
z HDLC number of a link
The HDLC number of a link is the number of the link in the LPV5 and CPC board. The
link communication rate is 64 kbit/s. Each board has 32 links, numbered in a unified
way within a module. Figure 1-2 shows the relationship between the LPV5 boards in
the SM control frame and the link numbers.

1-5
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

Slot
Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 18 Slot 19 Slot 20
position
Link
numbers of 0¿1 32 ¿ 63 64 ¿ 95 96 ¿ 127 128 ¿ 159
the second MEM 0 LPV5 1 LPV5 2 LPV5 3 LPV5 4
frame
Main
control
frame
Link
numbers of 160 ¿ 191 192 ¿ 223 224 ¿ 255 256 ¿ 287 288 ¿ 319
the first MEM 5 LPV5 6 LPV5 7 LPV5 8 LPV5 9
frame

Figure 1-2 Relationship between link numbers and LPV5 boards

According to the figure, the start link number of a board is the product of the board
number and 32.

Although Slot 16 is allocated with link numbers, it is only installed with the Memory
Board (MEM). The LPV5 boards are installed from Slot 17.

At present, the LPV5 board has two hardware versions, CB01LPV5 and CB03LPV5.
The CB01LPV5 board provides four HDLC links and only the first four links of each
CB01LPV5 board are valid. The CB03LPV5 board provides eight HDLC links and only
the first eight links of each CB03LPV5 board are valid. Pay attention to the difference.

For the Service Processing Module (SPM), each CPC board provides eight HDLC
links. In data setting, the first eight links are valid.
z Numbering of circuits and E1s of a trunk board
An SM trunk frame has 16 boards at most. If an SM has only one trunk frame, the
hardware configuration and board numbers are as shown in Figure 1-3. If an SM has
multiple trunk frames, carry out the LST BRD command to query the board numbers.

Slot 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 1 12 13 14 15 16 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
0 1 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
P DD D D W D D D D D D D D W D D D D D D D D P
W T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T R R R R W
C F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F V V V V C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 1 1
3 4 5
WT: Wiring Trough

Figure 1-3 Trunk board number and slot number

Each Digital Trunk Board (DTF) provides two E1s. The relationship between start E1
number and the DTF board number is as follows:

1-6
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

Start E1 number of a DTF board = DTF board number % 2

The relationship between the start circuit number of the first E1 and the DTF board
number is as follows:

Start circuit number of the first E1 of a DTF board = 32 % DTF board number % 2

The relationship between the start circuit number of the second E1 and the DTF board
number is as follows:

Start circuit number of the second E1 of a DTF board = 32 % DTF board number % 2 +
32

Note:
At present, the V5-interface does not support the T1 mode.

1.2 V5 Trunk Configuration

I. V5 trunk group configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD V5TG Add a V5 trunk group
MOD V5TG Modify a V5 trunk group
RMV TG Remove a V5 trunk group
LST TG List V5 trunk groups

2) Main parameters
[trunk group]

Trunk groups are numbered in a unified way in an office. The parameter ranges from 0
to 65535. It is referenced by the parameters corresponding to the V5 trunk circuit
data.

Note:
z To remove a V5 trunk group, use the RMV TG command.
z To query V5 trunk groups, use the LST TG command.

1-7
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

z Before carrying out the ADD V5TG command, the call source data must already exist.

1-8
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

II. PCM attribute addition

Note:
For parameter meanings, refer to the Office Data Volume of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System
Operation Manual.

III. Configuration of SM V5 trunk circuit

To operate V5 trunk circuits, take an E1 (32 trunk circuits) as the unit, which
corresponds to a V5 link of 2.048 Mbit/s. The link is identified by a V5 link ID.
1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD V5TKC Add V5 trunk circuits
MOD V5TKC Modify a V5 trunk circuit
LST V5TKC List V5 trunk circuits
RMV TKC Remove V5 trunk circuits

2) Main parameters
[trunk group]

It is the number of an already added trunk group.

[start E1/T1 number], [end E1/T1 number]

V5 trunk circuits are expressed in E1s. One E1 contains 32 trunk circuits. The start E1
number stands for the number of the start E1 occupied by the trunk circuits to be
added.

The end E1 number stands for the number of the end E1 occupied by the trunk circuits
to be added. The end E1 number should not be smaller than the start E1 number.
When the end E1 number is not specified, the system considers it same as the start
E1 number by default.

[V5 link ID]

It identifies a 2.048 Mbit/s link and must be unique in a V5-interface. It should be

specified through negotiation with the AN. It indicates the V5 link ID of the start E1.
The following IDs increase one by one.

1-9
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

Note:
Before adding a V5 trunk circuit, the V5TK board (whose logical board number is equal to the integer part
of the result of the division of the trunk circuit number by 64) must already exist.
Before adding a V5 trunk circuit, the trunk group to which the V5 trunk circuit belongs must have been
defined. The trunk circuit number must be unique in the specified range.
For the calculation of the E1 number, refer to 1.1.2 Principle and Cautions in this chapter.

IV. Configuration of SPM V5 trunk data

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SPMV5TKC Add SPM V5 trunk circuits
MOD SPMV5TKC Modify an SPM V5 trunk circuit
RMV SPMTKC Remove SPM trunk circuits
LST SPMTKC List SPM trunk circuits

2) Main parameters
[trunk group]

It is the number of an already added V5 trunk group.

[in-card E1/T1 number]

It is the number of an E1 in the ET16 board or the SDH Photoelectric Interface Board
(STU, SDH stands for Synchronous Digital Hierarchy). For the ET16 board, the
parameter ranges from 0 to 15; for the STU board, the parameter ranges from 0 to 62.

[V5 link ID]

It identifies a 2.048 Mbit/s link and must be unique in a V5-interface. It should be

specified through negotiation with the AN.

Note:
Only one E1 can be added at one time.

1-10
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

1.3 V5-Interface Configuration

The setup of a V5-interface is a process of cooperation between the LE and an AN.

Through the V5-interface ID, the exchange and access network are associated.
Communication links of both sided are checked through the logical C-channel ID of
the primary link. The link number and circuit number determine a physical C-channel.

I. SM V5-interface configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD V5IFC Add a V5-interface
MOD V5IFC Modify a V5-interface
RMV V5IFC Remove a V5-interface
LST V5IFC List V5-interface information
DSP V5IFC Display V5-interface status

2) Main parameters
[module]

It is the number of the SM where the V5-interface is in. The range is from 1 to 128. By
default, it is the number of the module where the V5 trunk group is in.

[V5 interface ID]

The range is from 0 to 16777215. It is unique and distinguishes V5-interfaces, and is

allocated through negotiation of both sides. It is used on V5 initialization.

[V5 trunk group]

It is the number of the trunk group of the E1 that is used by the V5-interfaces. It is the
number of an already added V5 trunk group.

[circuit of main/secondary link]

The range is from 0 to 6399. It indicates the signaling time slot number in a
2.048 Mbit/s link of a V5-interface, that is, trunk circuit number, which determines a
physical C-channel. The value should be the time slot 16 of a relevant Pulse Code
Modulation (PCM) system. The relationship between the PCM system and the board
number is as follows.

First PCM system of a board: 2 % trunk board number % 32 + 16

Second PCM system of a board: (2 % trunk board number + 1) % 32 + 16

1-11
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

[HDLC number of main/secondary link]

The range is from 0 to 319. It is the channel number of a signaling link of a LPV5 board.
Each LPV5 board processes four or eight links simultaneously (the CB01LPV5 board
processes four links, and the CB03LPV5 board processes eight links). The start link
number of a LPV5 board is the board number multiplied by 32. According to the board
type, only the first four or eight links are valid.

[primary link logical C-channel ID]

The range is from 0 to 65534. It is the unique ID of a logical C-channel. The logical
C-channel ID at the AN side and at the LE side should be negotiated and kept
consistent.

[circuit of PSTN physical C-channel ], [HDLC of PSTN physical C-channel ], [PSTN

logical C-channel ID ]

The above parameters are of the V5.2 protection group 1. Their default values are the
same as the corresponding circuit number/HDLC number/ID of the primary link, and
needn’t to be filled in. The parameters in the V5.2 protection group 2 can be carried on
the physical C-channel of the non-primary link and non-secondary link.

[circuit of 1st standby physical C-channel], [HDLC of 1st standby physical C-channel],
[circuit of 2nd standby physical C-channel], [HDLC of 2nd standby physical
C-channel], [circuit of ISDN-D physical C-channel 0], [HDLC of ISDN-D physical
C-channel 0], [ISDN-D logical C-channel 0 ID], [circuit of ISDN-D physical C-channel
1], [HDLC of ISDN-D physical C-channel 1], [ISDN-D logical C-channel 1 ID], [circuit
of ISDN-D physical C-channel 2], [HDLC of ISDN-D physical C-channel 2], [ISDN-D
logical C-channel 2 ID], [circuit of ISDN-D physical C-channel 3], [HDLC of ISDN-D
physical C-channel 3], [ISDN-D logical C-channel 3 ID], [circuit of ISDN-D physical
C-channel 4] [HDLC of ISDN-D physical C-channel 4],[ISDN-D logical C-channel 4 ID]

The above parameters are meaningful only in the V5.2 protection group 2. At present
they are not applied yet (in future used in the case of mass V5 ISDN users), so do not
fill in.

[interface type]

It is the type of a V5-interface and must be negotiated with the opposite AN. Generally
the value is V5.2-interface.

[protection group provides conditions]

It is determined along with the AN side. There are three options.

No protection group: No protecting C-channel will be set up in the primary link and
secondary link, that is, the protection mechanism will not be provided. In this case, the
index fields followed are invalid.

1-12
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

Protection group 1: Protecting C-channels will be set up in both primary and

secondary link and protection is provided for the primary link.

Protection group 2: Protecting C-channels will be set up in both primary and

secondary link and protection is provided for communication channels.

[V5 variable code]

The range is from 0 to 127. It is the code of the variable allocated by V5 on

initialization. The value should be determined along with the AN side. Generally it is 0.

[start at the specified time]

If it is “YES”, the out-band calling line identification is supported. If it is “NO”, the

out-band calling line identification is not supported. It is set according to actual
requirements. Generally set it to “NO”.

[used during the restart]

It controls whether to check links in the case of restarting. Generally set it to “YES”.

[used during the re-provisioning]

It controls whether to check links in the case of re-provisioning. Generally set it to

“NO”.

[start when recovering]

It controls whether to check links when links recover from faults. Generally set it to
“YES”.

Note:
z The parameter "Module" must be valid.
z The "V5-interface ID" must be unique in a module. In practice, generally choose a meaningful value.
z The parameters "V5-interface ID", "V5 variable code" and "primary link logical C-channel ID" must be
determined along with the access network.
z HDLC number and circuit number of the secondary link are not used when there is no protection
group.
z Usually, other parameters are set to the default values.

3) Example
z Set up a V5.2-interface without protection group in Module 3. The interface ID is
1, the trunk group number is 12, the circuit number of the primary link is 144, the
HDLC number of the primary link is 32, and the logical C-channel ID of the
primary link is 1. Type the following command.

1-13
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

ADD V5IFC: MN=3, IID=1, TKG=12, MCN=144, MHC=32, MID=1, BS=NONE;

Here, MN stands for module number; IID for interface ID; TKC for trunk group number;
MCN for circuit number of the primary link; MHC for HDLC number of the primary link;
MID for primary link logical C-channel ID; BS for provided protection group.
z Set up a V5-interface of the protection group 1 in Module 3. The interface ID is 2,
the trunk group number is 11, the circuit number of the primary link is 80, the
HDLC number of the primary link is 33, the logical C-channel ID of the primary
link is 2, the circuit number of the secondary link is 112, and the HDLC number of
the secondary link is 34. Type the following command.
ADD V5IFC: MN=3, IID=2, TKG=11, MCN=80, MHC=33, MID=2, FCN=112, FHC=34,
BS=B1;

Here, MN stands for module number; IID for interface ID; TKC for trunk group number;
MCN for circuit number of the primary link; MHC for HDLC number of the primary link;
MID for primary link logical C-channel ID; BS for provided protection group; FCN for
circuit number of the secondary link; FHC for HDLC number of the secondary link.
The last two parameters will not be provided if there is no protection group.

II. SPM V5-interface configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SPMV5IFC Add an SPM V5-interface
MOD SPMV5IFC Modify an SPM V5-interface
RMV V5IFC Remove an V5-interface

2) Main parameters
[primary link interface frame number], [primary link ET16/STU slot number],[primary
link in-card E1/T1 number], [primary link circuit of E1/T1]

They specify the trunk circuit time slot of the E1 in the V5-interface to carry the
physical C-channel of the primary link. The circuit number of the E1 in the primary link
should be 16.

[primary link SPM frame number], [primary link CPC slot number], [primary link in-card
HDLC number]

These parameters specify the position of the links that process the V5 protocol.

[secondary link interface frame number], [secondary link ET16/STU slot number],
[secondary link in-card E1/T1 number], [secondary link circuit of E1/T1]

1-14
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

They specify the trunk circuit time slot of the E1 in the V5-interface to carry the
physical C-channel of the secondary link. The circuit number of the E1 in the
secondary link should be 16.

[secondary link SPM frame number], [secondary link CPC slot number], [secondary
link in-card HDLC number]

These parameters specify the position of the links that process the V5 protocol.

For the meanings of other parameters, refer to I. SM V5-interface configuration.

III. SM V5 channel configuration

If a V5-interface has relatively heavy traffic, or ISDN service is configured, the link
messages will be huge. Under this condition, add physical C-channels to share the
load.
1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD V5CHN Add a V5 physical C-channel
MOD V5CHN Modify a V5 physical C-channel
RMV V5CHN Remove a V5 physical C-channel
LST V5CHN List V5 physical C-channels

2) Main parameters
[circuit]

The range is from 0 to 6399. To specify it, observe the allocation principle and
sequence of C-channels described earlier in this chapter.

[logic C-channel ID]

It is the unique ID of the newly added C-channel that is to carry the ISDN Ds protocol,
and so on.

Note:
z The parameters "circuit number", "HDLC number" and "logic C-channel ID " must be negotiated with
the access network side.
z The command can add a maximum of three standby physical C-channels.
z The command is suitable for the interface of the V5.2 protection group 2.

1-15
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

IV. SPM V5 channel configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SPMV5CHN Add an SPM V5 physical C-channel
MOD SPMV5CHN Modify an SPM V5 physical C-channel
RMV SPMV5CHN Remove an SPM V5 physical C-channel
LST SPMV5CHN List SPM V5 physical C-channels

2) Main parameters
Refer to III. SM V5 channel configuration.

V. V5 variable configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD V5VAR Add a V5 variable
MOD V5VAR Modify a V5 variable
RMV V5VAR Remove a V5 variable
LST V5VAR List V5 variables

2) Main parameters
[V5 variable code]

It corresponds to the V5 variable code in the V5-interface data, which should be

consistent with that at the AN side.

[new V5 interface ID]

It is the ID of a new V5-interface. It must be unique in a module.

[zone1/2/3 device type]

It specifies the device running at respective provisioning zone after re-provisioning.

The option PSTN refers to analog user interface, Basic Rate Access (BRA) refers to
digital user interface, Primary Rate Access (PRA) refers to 30B+D user interface and
Digital Console (DCN) refers to digital console interface.

[start device of zone1/2/3]

The range is from 0 to 49999. It is the valid logical sequence number of a V5 user port
in respective zones. It is corresponding to the V5ST device table and the device
number in the V5 PRA device table.

1-16
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

[zone1/2/3 number]

The range is from 0 to2000. It is corresponding to the continuous number from the
start device number in the zone.

Note:
z "Module number" and "V5-interface ID" must be valid.
z For the same module number and V5-interface ID, "V5 variable code" cannot be repeated.
z The "new V5-interface ID" must be negotiated with the AN side.

1.4 V5 User Configuration

I. Configuration of V5 ordinary user

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD/ADB V5ST Add/add in batch V5ST users
MOD/MOB V5ST Modify/modify in batch attributes of V5 users
RMV/RMB V5ST Remove/remove in batch V5ST users
LST V5ST List attributes of V5 users

2) Main parameters
[L3 address]

The L3 address is the user address, which is the protocol address to recognize a user
port at both the AN side and the exchange side. The value is configured after
negotiation with the AN to keep consistent at both sides. For PSTN users, it is L3
address, and the range is from 0 to 32767. For ISDN users, it is encapsulation
address and the range is from 0 to 8175. In the case of interconnection with the
HONET (Access Network device developed by Huawei), it is recommended to
number the L3 addresses from 0.

[V5 interface ID]

The range is from 0 to 16777215. It directly references the corresponding parameter

of the V5-interface data.

[CLIP sending mode]

1-17
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) means to transmit the calling number in the band. Dual
Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) means to transmit the calling number in the band
through DTMF signals. MCS means to transmit the calling number out of the band.
Set it according to actual requirements.

[PBX indicating number]

If the V5ST is a Private Branch Exchange (PBX) subscriber, the parameter specifies a
V5ST number as a PBX indicating number.

Note:
PBX line hunting:
It is a characteristic function realized by the V5-interface of the C&C08 exchange in the access network.
Hunting of multiple telephones can be implemented at the AN side (various vendors’ access network
products are allowed), taking one telephone number as the PBX indicating number, other telephones as
PBX non-indicating numbers. Through data configuration, common line hunting or queuing in a Centrex
group can be realized, or line hunting between a console and common telephones, or between multiple
consoles. The mode is flexible and may be decided on the requirements of telecom operators. The
function is often applied to the service-type business such as pager station. With C&C08 V5-interfaces,
the users needing this function may access C&C08 exchanges conveniently through the access
network.

II. Configuration of V5 digital user

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD/ADB V5DSL Add/add in batch V5 BRA users
MOD/MOB V5DSL Modify/modify in batch V5 BRA users
RMV/RMB V5DSL Remove/remove in batch V5 BRA users
LST V5DSL List V5 BRA users

2) Main parameters
[L3 address]

The L3 address is the user port address, which is the protocol address to recognize a
user port at both the AN side and the exchange side. The value is configured after
negotiation with the AN to keep consistent at both sides. For ISDN users, it is
encapsulation address and the range is from 0 to 8175. In the case of interconnection
with the HONET, it is recommended to number the L3 addresses from 0.

1-18
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

[V5 interface ID]

The range is from 0 to 16777215. It is the unique ID to identify different V5-interfaces,

and directly references the corresponding parameter of the V5-interface data.

[equipment number]

A digital user occupies two equipment numbers and chooses the even one. The
parameter generally is allocated by system.

[logical C-channel ID of D signaling DS ], [logical C-channel ID of D signaling P],

[logical C-channel ID of D signaling F]

The "DS" stands for Digital Subscriber Signaling No.1 (DSS1), "P" for packet trunk,
"F" for frame relay. These parameters are allocated automatically by the system.

For the meanings of other parameters, refer to I. Configuration of V5 ordinary user.

1.5 Examples

1.5.1 Adding SM V5 DSL Users

I. Example

1) Basic data
To configure a V5-interface in an SM, first add the DTF board, the Dual Tone
Transmit/Receive Board (DTR) and LPV5 board at the LE side. The parameters are
as follows after the negotiation with the AN.
z User data: L3 addresses are from 100 to 199.
z Interface data: The protection group 1 of the V5.2-interface is used. The
V5-interface ID is 120, variable code is 0, and the logical C-channel ID of the
primary link is 2.
z Link data: There are four links in the interface. The link IDs are 0, 1, 2, 3
respectively.
Figure 1-4 and Figure 1-5 show the hardware configuration.

Front panel of the DTF

2 7 21
frame

P D W D P
W T T T W
C F F C
3 4
WT: Wiring Trough

Figure 1-4 Boards in the V5-interface trunk frame

1-19
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

Front panel of the

2 17 18
main control frame
P N N N E M L L P
W O O O M P P P W
B B
C D D D A U C C V V C
N N
K K 5 5
E E
P S S M V V D P
T T
W I I P T W
C G G U R C

Figure 1-5 Boards in the V5-interface main control frame

According to Figure 1-4, the two DTF boards are in slots 5 and 7, and board numbers
are 3 and 4. The trunk circuit numbers respectively are from 192 to 255, and 256 to
319. According to Figure 1-5, the two LPV5 boards are in slots 17 and 18. The link
numbers respectively are from 32 to 63 and 64 to 95 (only first eight or first four links
are valid).

The active physical C-channel of the protection group 1 is in the time slot 16 with link
ID 2, using HDLC link 0 of the LPV5 board whose board number is 2 (slot 18).

The standby physical C-channel of the protection group 1 is in the time slot 16 with
link ID 0, using HDLC link 0 of the LPV5 board whose board number is 1 (slot 17).

There are 100 V5DSL users and the telephone numbers are from 6680000 to
6680099.
2) Preset conditions
z The trunk frame and V5 trunk board have been configured in SM 85, and the
relevant boards run normally.
z LPV5 and DTR boards have been added in the control frame, and the relevant
boards run normally.
z The charging data of V5DSL users whose charging source code is 12 and
charging selection code is 13 has been configured.

II. Procedures

No. Command name Command function

1 ADD CALLSRC Add call source*
2 ADD V5TG Add V5 trunk group
3 ADD PCMATR Add PCM attributes
4 ADD V5TKC Add V5 trunk circuit

1-20
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

No. Command name Command function

5 ADD V5IFC Add V5-interface
6 ADD CNACLD Add V5 call prefix*
7 ADD DNSEG Add number segment*
8 ADD ISDNDAT Add ISDN data**
9 ADD V5DSL Add V5 digital subscriber

Note:
z indicates that you can refer to the Office Data Volume or the Subscriber Data Volume of the C&C08
Digital SPC Switching System – Operation Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands.
z indicates that you can refer to “chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration” in this volume for detailed
descriptions of the ISDN data.

III. Configuration

1) Add/Modify a call source.

z Query call sources.
LST CALLSRC:;

According to the catogories of call sources, decide whether to add a new call source.
If a new call source is required, select a proper call source code. Suppose the call
source code “0” is unused here.
z Add a call source.
Add a call source. The call source code is” 0”, the number of pre-received number
digits is “3” and DN Set is” 0”. Type the following command.

ADD CALLSRC: CSC=0, PRDN=3, P=0:

Here, CSC stands for the call source and is mandatory, which will be referenced by V5
trunk group data and V5 user data.

PRDN stands for pre-received number digits.

P stands for the DN Set, which will be referenced by the number segment data, V5
user data and basic prefix data.
2) Add a V5 trunk group.
z Query trunk groups.
LST TG:;

1-21
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

Select one trunk group number currently unused after querying trunk groups.
Suppose the trunk group number 2 is unused.
z Add a V5 trunk group.
Add a V5 trunk group according the above call source data and trunk group data.
Suppose the name of the V5 trunk group is “V5TGP1”.

ADD V5TG: TG=2, TGN=”V5TGP1”;

Here, TG stands for the V5 trunk group number, which will be referenced by V5 trunk
circuit data and V5-interface data.

The call source code here is 0 by default. Although it is optional, it should be a defined
value in the call source data. The corresponding parameters of the added call source
code will be referenced.
z Query the newly added trunk group.
LST TG: TG=2;
Basic parameter
---------------
Group number = 2
Title = V5TCP1
Circuit type = V5tk
Call source = 0

--- END
3) Add PCM attributes.
According to Figure 1-4, the board numbers of the two DTF boards are 3 and 4, and
corresponding E1 numbers are from 6 to 9.

ADD PCMATR: MN=85, PN=6, PT=E1;

ADD PCMATR: MN=85, PN=7, PT=E1;

ADD PCMATR: MN=85, PN=8, PT=E1;

ADD PCMATR: MN=85, PN=9, PT=E1;

4) Add V5 trunk circuits.
z Add V5 trunk circuits.
According to Figure 1-4, the board numbers of the two DTF boards are 3 and 4, and
corresponding E1 numbers are from 6 to 9. V5 link IDs after negotiation are from 0 to
3.

ADD V5TKC: TG=2, MN=85, SL=6, EL=9, V5PCM=0;

Here, TG stands for V5 trunk group number, which directly references the
corresponding parameter of the V5 trunk data.

1-22
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

MN stands for module number, SL and EL are respectively the start E1 number and
end E1 number.

V5PCM is the V5 link ID corresponding to the first E1. Here it is “0”, the rest three V5
link IDs respectively correspond to 1, 2, 3.
z Query V5 trunk circuits to check whether the V5 trunk circuits have been
correctly added.
LST V5TKC: MN=85:
V5 trunk circuit logical parameter
----------------------------------
Module V5 interface ID V5 link ID Logical E1/T1 number Start circuit End
circuit

85 Interface not configured 0 6 192 220

85 Interface not configured 1 7 224 255
85 Interface not configured 2 8 256 207
85 Interface not configured 3 9 288 319

(Result number = 4)

--- END
5) Add a V5-interface.
z Add a V5-interface.
According to Figure 1-4 and Figure 1-5 and the data after negotiation, the primary link
number and secondary link number are 64 and 32 respectively. According to the
above query result, the time slot 16 of the link with V5 link ID 0 is “208”, and the time
slot 16 of the link with V5 link ID 2 is ”272”.

ADD V5IFC: MN=85, IID=120, TKG=2, MCN=272, MHC=64, MID=2, FCN=208,

FHC=32, BS=B1;

Here, IDD stands for V5-interface ID, MID for primary link logical C-channel ID, BS for
protection group. In this example, the protection group 1 is provided. These are the
values negotiated by the AN and LE.

MCN stands for the circuit number of the primary link. Here it is “272”. Select the first
E1 of the DTF board of in Slot 7 (Board 4). In the primary link, only one physical
C-channel is allocated, so select the time slot “16”.

FCN stands for the circuit number of the secondary link. Here it is “208”. Select the
first E1 of the DTF board in Slot 5 (Board 3). In the secondary link, only one physical
C-channel is allocated, so select the time slot “16”.

1-23
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

MHC stands for HDLC number of the primary link. Here it is “64”. Select the first link of
the LPV5 board in Slot 18 (Board 2).

FHC stands for HDLC number of the secondary link. Here it is “32”. Select the first link
of the LPV5 board in Slot 17 (Board 1).

For the sake of transmission security and reliability, different boards should b selected
for MHC, FHC, MCN and FCN.

TKG stands for V5 trunk group, which directly references the corresponding
parameter of the V5 trunk group.

BS stands for provided protection group.

z Query the added V5-interface.
LST V5IFC: MN=85, IID=120;
V5 interface data
-----------------
Trunk group number = 2
Module = 85
V5 interface number = 0
V5 interface ID = 120
Interface type = V5.2 interface
Protection group provides conditions = Protective group 1
Start at the specified time = FALSE
Used during the restart = FALSE
Used during the re-provisioning = FALSE
Start when recovering = FALSE

Physical C-channel
------------------
Index Channel type Module Circuit HDLC number Logical C-channel ID
0 Primary link 85 272 64 2
1 Secondary link 85 208 32 <NULL>
Bearer protocol
PSTN
<NULL>
(Result number = 2)

--- END
6) Add a call prefix.
z Query call prefixes.
LST CNACLD:

1-24
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

It checks whether the call prefix of the basic service prefix 6680 exists. If it exists,
check whether its service attribute, minimum number length, maximum number length
and charging selection code are proper. If it does not exist, carry out the MOD
CNACLD command to modify the improper attributes. Here suppose the required call
prefix does not exist.
z Add a call prefix.
The basic service prefix is “6680”, the service type is “Basic service”, the service
attribute is “Local”, the minimum/maximum number length is ”4”, and the charging
selection code is “13”.

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K’6680, CSTP=BASE, CSA=LC, MINL=4, MAXL=4, CHSC=13;

Here, PFX stands for the call prefix, CSTP for service category, CSA for service
attribute, MINL, MAXL stand for minimum number length and maximum number
length respectively.

CHSC stands for charging selection code, which directly references the
corresponding parameter of the basic data in the example.

DnSet adopts the default value, which also directly references the corresponding
parameter of the call source data.
7) Add a number segment.
z Query number segments.
LST DNSEG:;

Suppose the segment of 6680000~6680099 has not been defined.

z Add a number segment.
ADD DNSEG: P=0, SDN=K'6680000, EDN=K'6680099, IDX=30001;

Here, P stands for DN Set, which directly references the corresponding parameter of
the call source data.
8) Add ISDN data.
z Query ISDN data.
LST ISDNDAT:;

Query ISDN indexes to check whether ISDN data of the B-channel with access
number 2 exists. Suppose the required data does not exist, and the ISDN index 0 is
unused.
z Add ISDN data.
Add ISDN data. The parameter ISDN index is ”0”, packet access is B-channel access
and maximum number of B-channel is “2”.

ADD ISDNDAT: ISDNX=0, BCHN=2:

1-25
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

Here, ISDNX stands for ISDN index, which will be referenced by V5DSL user data.

BCHN stands for maximum B-channel number. Select “2” for BRA digital user and
take the default values for other parameters.
9) Add V5 digital users.
Add in batch 100 V5 DSL users. The numbers are from 6680000 to 6680099. The
module number is “85”, the V5-interface ID is “120”, the start value of L3 address is
“100” and the charging source code is “12”.

ADB V5DSL: SDN=K'6680000, EDN=K'6680099, MN=85, IID=120, L3ADR=100,

RCHS=12;

The parameters SDN, EDN are respectively the start telephone number and end
telephone number of the V5 DSL users.

IID stands for V5-interface ID, which directly references the corresponding parameter
of the V5-interface data, and through which V5 user data and V5-interface are
associated with each other.

L3ADR stands for L3 address, which is negotiated by the LE and AN.

RCHS stands for charging source code, which is “12” here and directly references the
corresponding parameter of the basic data of the example.

CSC stands for call source and its default value is “0”. It directly references the
corresponding parameter of the call source data.

Both the number step length and L3 address step are 1 and the step lengths of all the
devices are the default value “2”.

The ISDN index value is “0”, which directly references the corresponding parameter of
the ISDN data.

1.5.2 Adding SPM V5 Users

I. Example

1) Basic data
To configure a V5-interface, first add two ET16 boards in the fourth interface frame
and add two CPC boards to process the V5 protocol in the eleventh SPM in the
twentieth SPM frame.

The parameters after negotiation with the AN are as follows.

z User data: L3 addresses are from 100 to 599.

1-26
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

z Interface data: The V5.2-interface protection group mode is used. The

V5-interface ID is “120”, the variable code is “0” and the logical C-channel ID of
the primary link is “2”.
z Link data: There are four links in the interface. The link IDs are 0, 1, 2, 3.
Figure 1-6 and Figure 1-7 show the hardware configuration.

2 5 6 LIM front panel

P E E Q Q P
W 1 1 S S W
S 6 6 I I S

Figure 1-6 Boards in the V5 service interface frame

Front panel of the 2 2

2 6
SPM frame 1 2
P S S B B C C P
W P P C C P P W
S C C C C C C S

Figure 1-7 Boards in the V5 service SPM frame

Allocate two links to the ET16 board in Slot 5. The two links respectively occupy the
fourteenth and fifteenth E1 ports. Allocate another two links to the ET16 board in Slot
6 and these two links respectively occupy 0# and 1# E1 ports.

The active physical C-channel of the protection group 1 is in the time slot 16 with link
ID 2, and it occupies HDLC link 0 of the CPC board in Slot 22.

The standby physical C-channel of the protection group 1 is in the time slot 16 with
link ID 0, and it occupies HDLC link 0 of the CPC board in Slot 21.

There are 500 V5 users and the telephone numbers are from 6680000 to 6680499.
2) Preset conditions
z The ET16 board has been installed in the fourth interface frame and it works
normally.
z The CPC board has been installed in the twentieth SPM frame and it works
normally.
z The SRM resource frame of the exchange has been installed and it works
normally.
z The frame number and slot number of the Multi-HW Interface Board (MHI)
connected to the CPC board respectively are 8, 2. The 6# connector of the MHI
board is connected with the CPC board to provide 2 Mbit/s HW signal.

1-27
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

z The V5 charging data has been configured, whose charging source code is 12
and charging selection code is 13.

II. Procedures

No. Command name Command function

1 ADD CPCCFG Add CPC board resource*
2 ADD PCMATR Add PCM attribute
3 ADD SPME1 Add E1 port*
4 ADD CALLSRC Add call source*
5 ADD V5TG Add V5 trunk group
6 ADD SPMV5TKC Add SPM V5 trunk circuit
7 ADD SPMV5IFC Add SPM V5-interface
8 ADD CNACLD Add call prefix*
9 ADD DNSEG Add number segment*
10 ADD V5ST Add V5 subscriber
11 MNT BRD Activate board*

Note:
indicates that you can refer to other volumes of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands.

III. Configuration

1) Configure the V5 protocol.

According to Figure 1-7 or relevant data, the SPM frame number and module number
are respectively 20 and 11, the CPC slot numbers are 21 and 22, the frame number
and slot number of the MHI board are respectively 8 and 2. According to the preset
conditions, the connector of the MHI board is 6#. From Table 1-1 and Table 1-2, the
HW numbers are 28 and 29.

ADD CPCCFG: FN=20, BN=21, MN=11, LKT=V5, LIMFN=8, MHIBN=2, SHW=28;

ADD CPCCFG: FN=20, BN=22, MN=11, LKT=V5, LIMFN=8, MHIBN=2, SHW=29;

1-28
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

Note:
The start HW number is determined by the HW connector connected to the MHI board. The HW numbers
in the pure 2 Mbit/s mode are as shown in Table 1-1, and those in the hybrid mode are as shown in Table
1-2.

Table 1-1 HW numbers in the pure 2 Mbit/s mode

Connector
0# 1# 2# 3# 4# 5# 6# 7#
position
HW number 16,17 18,19 20,21 22,23 24,25 26,27 28,29 30,31

Table 1-2 HW numbers in the hybrid mode

Connector
0# 1# 2# 3# 4# 5# 6# 7#
position
HW number 24,25 26,27 28,29 30,31

2) Configure SPM E1 data.

According to Figure 1-6 and Figure 1-7 and relevant data, the number of the interface
frame is 4, the number of the involved module is 11, and the E1 type is V5TK. If the
slot number of the ET16 board is 5, the start E1 is No.14 and the end E1 is No.15. If
the slot number of the ET16 board is 6, the start E1 is No.0 and the end E1 is No.1.
The E1 working mode is Common Channel Mode (CCS).

ADD SPME1: FN=4, BN=5, SN=14, EN=15, MN=11, DID=V5TK, MOD=CCS;

ADD SPME1: FN=4, BN=6, SN=0, EN=1, MN=11, DID=V5TK, MOD=CCS;

Here, FN stands for the interface frame number, BN for ET16/STU slot number, SN for
start E1/T1 number, EN for end E1/T1 number, DID for E1/T1 device type, and MOD
for E1/T1 signaling mode.
3) Add/Modify a call source.
z Query call sources.
LST CALLSRC:

According to the catogories of call sources, decide whether to add a new call source.
If a new call source is required, select a proper call source code. Suppose the call
source code “0” is unused here.
z Add a call source.
Add a new call source “0” with pre-received number digits “3” and DnSet “0”.

1-29
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

ADD CALLSRC: CSC=0, PRDN=3, P=0;

Here, CSC stands for the call source and is mandatory, which will be referenced by V5
trunk group data and V5 user data.

PRDN stands for pre-received number digits.

P stands for the DN Set, which will be referenced by the number segment data, V5
user data and basic prefix data.
4) Add a V5 trunk group.
z Query trunk groups.
LST TG:;

Select one trunk group number currently unused. Suppose the trunk group number
“2” is unused.
z Add a V5 trunk group.
Add a V5 trunk group according the above call source data and trunk group data.

ADD V5TG: TG=2, TGN=”V5TGP1”, CSC=0;

Here, TG stands for the V5 trunk group number, which will be referenced by V5 trunk
circuit data and V5-interface data.

The call source code here is 0 by default. Although it is optional, it should be a defined
value in the call source data. The corresponding parameters of the added call source
code will be referenced.
z Query the newly added trunk group.
LST TG: TG=2;
Basic parameter
---------------
Group number = 2
Title = V5TGP1
Circuit type = V5TK
Group direction = Outgoing trunk
Circuit selection = Minimum
Call-out authority = Intra-office
Call-in authority = Intra-office

--- END
5) Add V5 trunk circuits.
z Add V5 trunk circuits.
V5 link IDs after negotiation are from 0 to 3. Other data references the relevant data in
the SPME1 configuration.

1-30
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=4, BN=5, EN=14, TG=2, V5PCM=0;

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=4, BN=5, EN=15, TG=2, V5PCM=1;

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=4, BN=6, EN=0, TG=2, V5PCM=2;

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=4, BN=6, EN=1, TG=2, V5PCM=3;

Here, FN stands for the interface frame number, BN for E1/T1 slot number, EN for E1
number, and V5PCM for V5 link flag.

TG stands for V5 trunk group number, which directly references the corresponding
parameter of the added V5 trunk group data.
z Query V5 trunk circuits to check whether the V5 trunk circuits have been
correctly added.
LST SPMTKC: TG=2, FN=4;
Circuit provisioning
--------------------
Module Trunk group Frame number Slot number In-card E1/T1 number

11 2 4 5 14
11 2 4 5 15
11 2 4 6 0
11 2 4 6 1
(Result number = 4)

Circuit provisioning
--------------------
Frame number Slot number In-card E1/T1 number In-card E1/T1 start circuit
4 5 14 0
4 5 15 0
4 6 0 0
4 6 1 0

E1/T1 end circuit Circuit type

31 V5TK
31 V5TK
31 V5TK
31 V5TK
(Result number = 4)

--- END
6) Add a V5-interface.
z Add a V5-interface.

1-31
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

According to the basic data in the example and the newly added data, relevant V5
data can be obtained.

ADD SPMV5IFC: TKG=2, MN=11, IID=120, MLIMF=4, MES=6, MEN=0, MCN=16,

MSPMF=6, MCPCS=22, MHC=0, MID=2, FLIMF=4, FES=5, FEN=14, FCN=16,
FSPMF=6, FCPCS=21, FHC=0;

Here, TKG stands for V5 trunk group number, which is “2” and directly references the
corresponding parameter of the V5 trunk group.

MN stands for the module number, IID for V5-interface ID, and MID for the primary link
logical C-channel ID.

MLIMF stands for the interface frame number of the primary link, MES for the
ET16/STU slot number of the primary link, MEN for the in-card E1/T1 number of the
primary link, MCN for the circuit number of the E1/T1 of the primary link. Through
these parameters, the unique E1 number and V5 physical C-channel carrying the
primary link can be obtained. According to the planning, the primary link is in the first
E1 of the ET16 board in Slot 6 of Frame 4. The physical C-channel is the No.16 circuit
of the E1 port.

MSPMF stands for the SPM frame number of the primary link, MCPCS for the CPC
slot number of the primary link, MHC for the in-card HDLC number of the primary link.
Through these parameters, the unique link that processes the V5 protocol is obtained.
According to planning, it is the No. 0 link of the CPC board, which is in Slot 22 in the
No. 20 SPM frame, that processes the V5 protocol.

FLIMF stands for the interface frame number of the secondary link, FES for the
ET16/STU slot number of the secondary link, FEN for the in-card E1/T1 number of the
secondary link, FCN for the circuit number of the E1/T1 of the secondary link. Through
these parameters, the unique E1 number and V5 physical C-channel carrying the
secondary link can be obtained. According to the planning, the secondary link is in the
No. 14 E1 of the ET16 board in Slot 5 of Frame 4. The physical C-channel is the No.
16 circuit of the E1 port.

MSPMF stands for the SPM frame number of the secondary link, FCPCS for the CPC
slot number of the secondary link, FHC for the in-card HDLC number of the secondary
link. Through these parameters, the unique link that processes the V5 protocol can be
determined. According to the planning, it is the No. 0 link of the CPC board in Slot 21
of the No. 20 SPM frame that processes the V5 protocol.

Other parameters such as V5 variable, V5 protection group provided are set to the
default values. The provided V5 protection group is protection group 1 by default.
z Query the added V5-interface.
LST V5IFC: MN=11;
V5 interface data

1-32
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

-----------------
Trunk group number = 2
Module = 11
V5 interface number = 0
V5 interface ID = 120
Interface type = V5.2 interface
Protection group provides conditions = Protective group 1
Start at the specified time = FALSE
Used during the restart = FALSE
Used during the re-provisioning = FALSE
Start when recovering = FALSE

Physical C-channel
------------------
Index Channel type Module Circuit HDLC number Logical C-channel ID
0 Primary link 11 80 64 2
1 Secondary link 11 16 32 <NULL>
Carries protocol
PSTN
<NULL>
(Result number = 2)

--- END

Note:
Here, it is supposed that the SPM uses only two ET16 boards. Otherwise, the circuit numbers may be
different.

7) Add a call prefix.

z Query call prefixes.
LST CNACLD ;

It checks whether the call prefix of the basic service prefix 6680 exists. If it exists,
check whether its service attribute, minimum number length, maximum number length
and charging selection code are proper. If it does not exist, carry out the MOD
CNACLD command to modify the improper attributes. Here suppose the required call
prefix does not exist.
z Add a call prefix.
Add a call prefix. The basic service prefix is “6680”, the service type is “basic type”,
the service attribute is “local”, the minimum/maximum number length is “4” and the

1-33
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

charging selection code is “13”. The call prefix, minimum number length, maximum
number length and charging selection code are all mandatory options.

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'6680, CSTP=BASE, CSA=LC, MINL=4, MAXL=4,CHSC=13;

Here, PFX stands for the call prefix, CSTP for service category, CSA for service
attribute, MINL, MAXL for minimum length of the number, and maximum length of the
number.

CHSC stands for the charging selection code, which directly references the
corresponding parameter in the preset conditions.

DnSet adopts the default value, which also directly references the corresponding
parameter of the call source data.
8) Add a number segment.
z Query number segments.
LST DNSEG:

Suppose the segment of 6680000 to 6680999 is not defined.

z Add a number segment.
ADD DNSEG: P=0, SDN=K'6680000, EDN=K'6680999, IDX=30001;

Here, P stands for DnSet, which directly references the corresponding parameter of
the call source data.
9) Add V5 users.
Add in batch 500 V5 ST users. The numbers are from 6680000 to 6680499, the L3
address starts from 100 and the charging source code is “12”.

ADB V5ST: SDN=K'6680000, EDN=K'6680499, DNSTEP=1, MN=11, IID=120,

L3ADR=100, RCHS=12;

Here, SDN and EDN stand for the start number and end number respectively,
DNSTEP for step length, MN for module number, IDD for V5-interface flag.

RCHS stands for the charging source code, which directly references the
corresponding parameter of the preset conditions.

The DnSet and call source value adopt the default values, which also directly
reference the corresponding parameters of the call source data.
10) Activate boards.
After the above configuration, activate the ET16 board and CPC board.

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=4, SN=5, OP=ACT;

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=4, SN=6, OP=ACT;

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=20, SN=21, OP=ACT;

1-34
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=20, SN=22, OP=ACT;

Here, MN stands for the number of the SPM to which the board belongs, F for the
number of the frame to which the board belongs, SN for the slot number of the board,
and OP for operation type.

1.5.3 Adding a V5-Interface

I. Example

1) Basic data
Add one more V5-interface (refer to Figure 1-6, Figure 1-7 and relevant descriptions
for the hardware configuration).

The parameters after the negotiation with the AN are as follows.

z Interface data: The protection group 1 of the V5.2–interface is used. The
V5-interface ID is 122, the variable code is 0, and the logical C-channel ID of the
primary link is 4.
z Link data: There are four links in the interface. The link IDs are 4, 5, 6, 7
respectively.
Allocate two links respectively for the ET16 boards in Slot 5 and Slot 6.

The active physical C-channel of the protection group 1 is in the time slot 16 of the
2.048 Mbit/s link with link ID 4.

The standby physical C-channel of the protection group 1 is in the time slot 16 of the
2.048 Mbit/s link with link ID 6.
2) Preset conditions
z The exchange is working normally.
z The configured V5-interface is working normally. There are idle E1s on the ET16
board and idle links on the CPC board.

II. Procedures

No. Command name Command function

1 ADD SPME1 Add E1 ports*
2 ADD V5TG Add V5 trunk group
3 ADD SPMV5TKC Add SPM V5 trunk circuit
4 ADD SPMV5IFC Add SPM V5-interface
5 MNT BRD Activate board*

1-35
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

Note:
“*” indicates that you can refer to other volumes of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands.

III. Configuration

1) Configure SPM E1 data.

z Query board status.
Query the board status to find the boards that are working normally. Thus, operators
can know the boards that may have idle E1s. Here, set the module number to "0", the
interface frame number to “4” and the board status to "Normal".

DSP FRM: MN=0, F=4, STS=NOR;

Module 0 frame 5 card status
-------------------------------
Slot number Card type Status
1 PWS Normal
5 ET16 Normal
6 ET16 Normal
25 PWS Normal
(Result number = 4)
1 reports in total
--- END
z Query SPM E1.
To allocate E1s correctly, first query the E1 utilization of the ET16 board to find idle
E1s.

LST SPME1: FN=4, BN=5;

E1/T1 attribute
---------------
Frame number Slot number In-card E1/T1 number SPM module E1/T1 logical
number
4 5 4 25 0
4 5 5 25 1
4 5 14 11 0
4 5 15 11 1

E1/T1 Device type

RDT
RDT
V5TK

1-36
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

V5TK
(Result number = 4)

--- END

According to the query results, select the No. 12 ET16 board and No. 13 E1 as the
trunk circuits.

Similarly, query the SPME1 utilization of Slot 16. Here, suppose the No. 2 and No. 3
E1s are unused and set them to V5 trunk circuits.
z Query CPC configuration.
LST CPCCFG: FN=20;
CPC card basic parameter
------------------------
SPM frame CPC slot SPM module In-SPM card number Logical card number Link
type
20 14 26 2 2 MTP
20 15 5 1 3 MTP
20 21 11 1 1 V5
20 22 11 2 2 V5
(Result number = 4)

--- END

Select the idle links of the CPC boards in Slots 21 and 22 in Frame 20 as the
V5-interface links. The links belong to SPM 11.
z Query board status.
DSP FRM: MN=0, F=20;

Query the status of the boards to check whether the selected CPC board works
normally. Here, suppose the selected board works normally.
z Configure SPM E1.
According to the query results, the interface frame number is “4”. Select the No. 12
and No. 13 E1s of the ET16 board in Slot 5 and No. 2 and No. 3 E1s of the ET16
board in Slot 6. The E1 type is “V5TK”, and the E1 working mode is “CCS” mode.
According to the query results of the CPC board, the involved module number is “11”.

ADD SPME1: FN=4, BN=5, SN=12, EN=13, MN=11, DID=V5TK, MOD=CCS;

ADD SPME1: FN=4, BN=6, SN=2, EN=3, MN=11, DID=V5TK, MOD=CCS;

Here, FN stands for the interface frame number, BN for ET16/STU slot number, SN for
start E1/T1 number, EN for end E1/T1 number, DID for E1/T1 device type, and MOD
for E1/T1 work mode.

1-37
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

2) Add a V5 trunk group.

z Query trunk groups.
LST TG:

Select a trunk group number currently unused. Here suppose the trunk group number
“4” is unused.
z Add a V5 trunk group.
Add a V5 trunk group and set its name to “V5TGP2”.

ADD V5TG: TG=4, TGN=”V5TGP2”;

Here, TG for the V5 trunk group number, which will be referenced by V5 trunk circuit
and V5-interface data. The default value of the call source is “0” and it directly
references the corresponding parameter of the call source data.
3) Add V5 trunk circuits.
z Add V5 trunk circuits.
The negotiated V5 link IDs are from 4 to 7, the V5 trunk group number is “4”, and other
circuit parameters directly reference the corresponding parameters in the SPM E1
configuration data.

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=4, BN=5, EN=12, TG=4, V5PCM=4;

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=4, BN=5, EN=13, TG=4, V5PCM=5;

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=4, BN=6, EN=2, TG=4, V5PCM=6;

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=4, BN=6, EN=3, TG=4, V5PCM=7;

Here, FN stands for the interface frame number, BN for ET16/STU slot number, EN for
in-card E1/T1 number, and V5PCM for V5 link ID.

TG stands for the V5 trunk group number, which directly references the corresponding
parameter of the V5 trunk group data.
z Query V5 trunk circuits.
LST SPMTKC: MN=11, FN=4;
Circuit provisioning
--------------------
Module Trunk group Frame number Slot number In-card E1/T1 number
11 2 4 5 14
11 2 4 5 15
11 2 4 6 0
11 2 4 6 1
11 4 4 5 12
11 4 4 5 13
11 4 4 6 2

1-38
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

11 4 4 6 3
(Result number = 8)

--- END
4) Add a V5-interface.
z Query V5 links.
According to the result of querying the CPC board, there are idle links in the CPC
boards in Slot 21 and Slot 22. Make further query to find the specific links in the CPC
board. The known module number is “0” (here the module number is the physical
module number, and the SPM belongs to the AM/CM physically). The frame number
is “20” and the slot numbers are respectively “22” and “23”.

DSP BRD: MN=0, F=20, SN=21;

DSP BRD: MN=0, F=20, SN=22;

Here suppose the No. 1 links of these two CPC boards are idle.
z Add a V5-interface.
According to the above results, the relevant circuit of the V5 link 4 is the standby
physical C-channel (slot 5, No. 12 E1 and 16 circuits). The relevant circuit of the V5
link 6 is the active physical C-channel (slot 6, No. 2 E1 and 16 circuits).

ADD SPMV5IFC: TKG=4, MN=11, IID=124, MLIMF=4, MES=6, MEN=2, MCN=16,

MSPMF=20, MCPCS=22, MHC=1, MID=4, FLIMF=4, FES=5, FEN=12, FCN=16,
FSPMF=20, FCPCS=21, FHC=1;

Here, TKG stands for the V5 trunk group 4, which directly references the
corresponding parameter of the V5 trunk group.

MN stands for module number, IID for V5-interface ID, MID for primary link logical
C-channel ID.

MLIMF stands for the interface frame number of the primary link, MES for the
ET16/STU slot number of the primary link, MEN for the in-card E1/T1 number of the
primary link, MCN for the circuit number of the E1/T1 of the primary link. Through
these parameters, the unique V5 physical C-channel carrying the primary link can be
obtained.

MSPMF for the SPM frame number of the primary link, MCPCS for the CPC slot
number of the primary link, MHC for the in-card HDLC number of the primary link.
Through these parameters, the unique link that processes the V5 protocol can be
obtained.

FLIMF stands for the interface frame number of the secondary link, FES for the
ET16/STU slot number of the secondary link, FEN for the in-card E1/T1 number of the
secondary link, FCN for the circuit number of the E1/T1 of the secondary link. Through

1-39
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

these parameters, the unique physical C-channel carrying the secondary link can be
obtained.

MSPMF stands for the SPM frame number of the secondary link, FCPCS for the CPC
slot number of the secondary link, FHC for the in-card HDLC number of the secondary
link. Through these parameters, the unique SPM that processes the V5 protocol and
the link of the CPC board of the module can be determined.

The above parameters are determined according to the previously returned results.

Other parameters such as V5 variable, V5 protection group, adopt the default values.
The V5 protection group is the protection group 1 by default.
z Query V5-interfaces.
LST V5IFC: MN=11;
V5 interface data
-----------------
Trunk group number Module V5 interface number V5 interface ID
2 11 0 120
2 11 1 122
Interface type Protection group provides conditions V5 variable code
V5.2 interface interface Protective group 1 0
V5.2 interface interface Protective group 1 0
--- END
5) Activate boards.
After the configuration, activate the ET16 board and CPC board.

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=4, SN=5, OP=ACT;

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=20, SN=22, OP=ACT;

Here, MN stands for the SPM number of the board, F for the frame number of the
board, SN for the slot number of the board, OP for operation type.

1.5.4 Deleting a V5-Interface

I. Example

1) Basic data
z Remove the V5-interface 122.
2) Preset condition
z The V5 users whose V5-interface ID is 122 do not exist.

1-40
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

II. Procedures

No. Command name Command function

1 RMV SPMV5IFC Remove SPM V5-interface
2 RMV SPMV5TKC Remove SPM V5 trunk circuit
3 RMV V5TG Remove V5 trunk group
4 RMV SPME1 Remove E1 ports*

Note:
“*” indicates that you can refer to other volumes of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands.

III. Configuration

1) Delete a V5-interface.
z Query V5-interfaces.
It is to find the module number and V5 trunk group number of the V5-interface to be
deleted.

LST V5IFC: IID=122;

V5 interface data
-----------------
Trunk group number Module V5 interface number V5 interface ID
4 11 1 122
Interface type Protection group provides conditions V5 variable code
V5.2 interface interface Protective group 1 0

--- END
z Delete a V5-interface.
RMV V5IFC: MN=11, IID=122;

Here, MN stands for the module number, which is “11” and is obtained from the query
of V5-interfaces. IID stands for V5-interface ID.
2) Delete V5 trunk circuits.
z Query SPM trunk circuits.
Query V5 trunk circuits to find the position of the SPM trunk circuits to be deleted.
According to the query of V5-interfaces, it is known that the V5 trunk group number is
“4”.

1-41
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

LST SPMTKC: TG=4;

Circuit provisioning
--------------------
Module Trunk group Frame number Slot number In-card E1/T1 number

11 4 4 5 12
11 4 4 5 13
11 4 4 6 2
11 4 4 6 3
(Result number = 4)
Circuit provisioning
--------------------
Frame number Slot number In-card E1/T1 number In-card E1/T1 start circuit
4 5 12 0
4 5 13 0
4 6 2 0
4 6 3 0

E1/T1 end circuit Circuit type

31 V5TK
31 V5TK
31 V5TK
31 V5TK
(Result number = 4)

--- END
z Delete trunk circuits.
RMV SPMTKC: FN=4, BN=5, EN=12;

RMV SPMTKC: FN=4, BN=5, EN=13;

RMV SPMTKC: FN=4, BN=6, EN=2;

RMV SPMTKC: FN=4, BN=6, EN=3;

Here, FN stands for the interface frame number, BN for slot number, and EN for
in-card E1 number.
3) Delete a V5 trunk group.
According to the query of V5-interfaces, it is know that the V5 trunk group number to
be deleted is “4”.

RMV TG: TG=4;

4) Delete E1s in batch.

1-42
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 1 V5 Data Configuration

According to the query of SPM trunk circuits, the position of the E1s to be deleted is
available.

RMV SPME1: FN=4, BN=5, SN=12, EN=13;

RMV SPME1: FN=4, BN=6, SN=2, EN=3;

Here, FN stands for the interface frame number, BN for ET16/STU slot number, SN for
start E1/T1 number, and EN for end E1/T1 number.

Note:
z If there is V5 user data, to delete V5-interfaces, first delete V5 user data and V5 number segment
data according to the restriction relationship between the data.
z From the restriction relationship, the deletion procedures of V5 users may be obtained easily. To
delete user data, pay more attention to the number segment data. Do not delete the number
segments if it is not absolutely necessary, because common number segment data is shared by
relevant users of various V5-interfaces.

1-43
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

2.1 Basic Concepts

The PRA stands for primary rate access. Its interface physical layer protocol I.431 is
based on the International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication
Standardization Sector (ITU-T) Recommendation G.703. There are E1 standard and
T1 standard corresponding to different rates.

B-channel: It is a 64 kbit/s subscriber information channel and also is a 64 kbit/s voice

channel and data channel conforming to ITU-T Recommendations G.711 and G.722
to realize circuit-switching, packet-switching and semi-permanent connection.

D-channel: It is a 16 kbit/s (D16) or 64 kbit/s (D64) signaling channel and transfers

circuit-switched signaling information and packet data information.

DSS1: It is divided into the network side and subscriber side. In one PCM system,
generally the time slot 16 is applied to transfer the DSS1 (D-channel). The time slot 0
is the clock synchronization channel, and the remaining 30 time slots are B-channels.

The PRA implementation modes are divided into the subscriber mode and trunk mode.
The service attribute in the basic service prefix analysis distinguishes these two
modes. For the subscriber mode, it is "Intra-office", while for the trunk mode, it is
"Local".
z In the PRA subscriber mode, PRA subscribers are considered as intra-office
subscribers. Detailed information of each PRA subscriber is recorded in the
office.
z In the PRA trunk mode, PRA subscribers are considered as local subscribers.
PRA subscriber management is only applicable for the default subscribers
corresponding to the PRA ports.
In application, the data tables involved in the subscriber mode and trunk mode are the
same. At present generally the trunk mode is adopted.

2.1.1 Configuration Procedures

The PRA data configuration includes the addition, deletion and modification of related
data. The PRA logic data involves route data, subscriber data and trunk data. There is
a reference and hierarchy relationship between different PRA data. The PRA data
should be configured in sequence based on the reference relationship so as to keep
the database consistent and safe, enhance the association between data and reduce

2-1
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

the data redundancy. Figure 2-1 shows the reference relationship between the PRA
data.

Trunk circuit

Trunk group
Subscriber
Prefix analysis Number
PRA signaling link

DNset ISDN index

Route analysis
Call source

Route
Sub-route

Office direction

Figure 2-1 Reference relationship between the PRA data

The contents in the figure indicate the data to be set, and the connecting line indicates
a reference relationship. The data of a lower position is to be referenced by the data of
an upper position. The relationship shows that an addition or modification of the data
should be in the ascending order and a removal of the data should be in the
descending order.

For example, to add route data, first add sub-route data. To add trunk group data, first
add subscriber number data, sub-route data and PRA signaling link data. To add
subscriber number data, first add Dn set data, ISDN index data and route analysis
data should be made before the subscriber data are configured.

2.1.2 Configuration Principles and Cautions

I. Principle of PRA trunk configuration

z The calling number provision mode of the PRA trunk group must be set to
“default number” instead of “trunk line ID”. Otherwise, the trunk mode is invalid.
z A PRA default number is only valid for its module. Other modules should have
their own default numbers. The default number cannot be used by other
modules.
z When establishing a PRA link, at one side, there should be "Network" and at the
other side, there should be "Subscriber". That is, when adding a PRA trunk group,
the selected signaling type must match that of the peer end. If one side is
“Subscriber”, the opposite side should be “Network”; and if one side is “Network”,
the other side should be “Subscriber”.

2-2
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

II. Principle of PCM port configuration

In most cases, one PRA link controls one PCM port and no additional PCM port
configuration is required. If PRA link resources are lack and one signaling link controls
multi PCM systems, it is required to configure additional PCM ports. Pay attention to
the following points when adding PCM ports.
z The new PCM port and signaling link should be in a module.
z One link supports a maximum of four PCM ports.
z When adding PCM ports, relevant data should be added at both sides and the
port IDs of a PCM system should be the same at both sides.

III. Principle of PRA subscriber configuration

z The PRA call-in/call-out authority is controlled by the default number instead of

by the trunk group call-in/call-out authority.
z If the called number sent to the PRA subscriber is “Subscriber number”, not
“National number”, select “Direct-Dialing-In (DDl)” authority for PRA subscribers.
z In the PRA trunk mode, the PRA subscriber number should correspond the
default calling number of the trunk group.
z If to provide the calling number to the peer end, select the PRA subscriber's
Calling Line Identity Presentation (CLIP) service.

IV. Cautions

z Negotiated PRA data

When configuring relevant PRA data, negotiate PRA signaling circuit, PCM port ID
and signaling type.
z Calculation of PRA link number
Figure 2-2 shows the relationship between PRA protocol processing boards (LPRAs)
in the SM control frame and the link numbers.

Slot position Slot 16 Slot 17 Slot 18 Slot 19 Slot 20

Link numbers 0 ¿ 31 32 ¿ 63 64 ¿ 95 96 ¿ 127 128 ¿ 159

of the No. 2
frame MEM 0 LPRA 1 LPRA 2 LPRA 3 LPRA 4
Main
control
frame 160 ¿
Link numbers 192 ¿ 223 224 ¿ 255 256 ¿ 287 288 ¿ 319
of the No. 1 191
frame LPRA 6 LPRA 7 LPRA 8 LPRA 9
MEM 5

Figure 2-2 Relationship between link numbers and LPRA boards

According to the figure, the start link number of a board is the product of the board
number and 32.

2-3
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

The LPRA board is available in two types, namely, single–CPU LPRA board and
double-CPU LPRA board. The single-CPU LPRA board provides only four PRA links,
so only the first four links in a board are valid. The double-CPU LPRA board provides
eight PRA links, so only the first eight links in a board are valid.

Although Slot 16 is allocated with link numbers, it is only installed with the MEM board.
The LPRA boards are installed from Slot 17.

For the SPM, each CPC board provides 16 PRA links. In data setting, only the first 16
links are valid.
z Calculation of circuit number of a trunk board
An SM trunk frame can be installed with 16 boards at most. If an SM has only one
trunk frame, the hardware configuration and board numbers are as shown in Figure
2-3. If an SM has multiple trunk frames, carry out the LST BRD command to query the
board numbers.

Slot
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
numbe 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3
r

D D D D D D D D D D
P D D D D D D P
T T T T T T T T T T D D D D
W T T T T T T F F W F F F F R R R R
W W
F F F F T F F F F F F T
C 1 1 1 1 1 1 V V V V C
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5
WT: Wiring Trough

Figure 2-3 Trunk board number and slot number

Each DTF board provides two E1s. The relationship between the start E1 number and
DTF board number is as follows:

Start E1 number of a DTF board = DTF board number % 2

The relationship between the start circuit number of the first E1 and the DTF board
number is as follows:

Start circuit number of the first E1 of a DTF board = 32 % DTF board number % 2

The relationship between the start circuit number of the second E1 and the DTF board
number is as follows:

Start circuit number of the second E1 of a DTF board = 32 % DTF board number % 2 +
32.

2-4
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

2.2 PRA Subscriber Configuration

I. ISDN data configuration

The ISDN data describes BRA service and PRA service of the ISDN. It records call
attributes and transmission attributes.
1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD ISDNDAT Add ISDN data
MOD ISDNDAT Modify ISDN data
RMV ISDNDAT Remove ISDN data
LST ISDNDAT Display ISDN data

2) Main parameters
[ISDN index]

It will be referenced by PRA subscriber data. Generally, “0” indicates 2B+D, “1”
indicates 30B+D, that is, primary rate interface.

[transmission capability]

Select the options based on actual transmission capability. Generally select all
(default value).

[transmission speed]

Make the selection based on actual transmission speed. Generally select all (default
value).

[circuit accessing]

It indicates whether it is the circuit accessing or not. Select according to the subscriber
condition. Generally select “Yes” (default value).

[packet accessing]

It indicates the setup mode of a virtual circuit in the S/T reference point during the
packet accessing. Select according to the specific subscriber condition. Generally
select “B-channel access”.

[forwarding notice mode]

Select according to the subscriber condition. Generally select “None” (default value).

[forwarding notice caller]

2-5
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Select according to the subscriber demands. It is recommended to select “Yes_with

the forwarding destination subscriber number”. The default value is “No”.

[max. B- channel number ]

The range is 0~30. Select “30” for the PRA service.

[call max. times]

Set it according to subscriber demands. Set it to “5” for Digital Subscriber Line (DSL),
and “20” for PRA subscriber generally.

[called number change index]

It will change the number according the index.

II. PRA subscriber configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD PRA Add a PRA subscriber
MOD PRA Modify attributes of a PRA subscriber
RMV PRA Remove a PRA subscriber
LST PRA List PRA subscribers

2) Main parameters
[telephone number]

In the PRA trunk mode, this parameter will be referenced by the corresponding
parameter in the PRA trunk group data. It should be a real telephone number.

[route selection]

It should be consistent with the corresponding parameter in the call prefix data.

[ISDN index]

It indicates the type of the ISDN interface and directly references the available ISDN
index.

[module]

It will be referenced by the relevant parameter in the PRA trunk group data.

2-6
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Note:
The module number should be consistent with that of the PRA trunk group. Otherwise the call may fail.

[charging source code]

It corresponds to a charging mode and directly references the corresponding data in

the “charging case”.

[call-in authority]

Select all by default. The call-in authority controls the PRA outgoing call.

[call-out authority]

Select all except national and internet toll call by default. The call-out authority
controls the PRA incoming call.

[supplementary service]

Generally select direct dial-in and calling line identification presentation.

Set other parameters to their default values. Meanings of other parameters are the
same as those of the parameters for ordinary subscribers. The call source code and
DN set, however, should directly reference the corresponding parameters in the call
source and number segment data.

2.3 PRA Link Configuration

I. SM PRA link configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD PRALNK Add a PRA link
MOD PRALNK Modify a PRA link
RMV PRALNK Remove a PRA link
LST PRALNK Display a PRA link

2) Main parameters
[signaling link number]

It is the number of the signaling link channel of the LPRA board corresponding to the
PRA trunk. Signaling link numbers are numbered within one module and cannot be
repeated in a module. The start link number of a LPRA board is the product of the

2-7
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

board number and 32. In an SM, if the LPRA board has only one CPU, it supports four
links. If the LPRA has two CPUs, it supports eight links. That is, the first four or eight
links are valid.

[signaling circuit number]

The signaling circuit is the trunk circuit carrying PRA signaling messages. The
semi-permanent connection between the circuit and the above signaling link is set up
in the exchange. The range is 0-6399. At present the trunk circuit number of a
signaling link is set fixedly to the time slot 16 of the E1/T1 of the corresponding trunk
group.

[network check flag]

When it is set to “No”, the real calling number will be transparently transmitted. When
it is set to “Yes”, the calling number will be changed to the default PRA number
corresponding to the selected trunk group. Generally it is set to “Yes”.

[caller number change index]

It is for the change of the PRA calling number. In common conditions, it is not used.
Here select the default value “no change” (the change of the PRA calling number
generally is implemented through ordinary number change).

Note:
z If the network check flag is set to “yes” and no calling number is received, take the default number on
the trunk group as the calling number for this time. If the calling number is received, judge if it is legal.
If it is legal, the real calling number will be the calling number of the call; if it is illegal, take the default
number as the calling number. Then reselect a circuit according to the circuit selection mode and the
trunk group of the transmitted circuit. Process charging, authority and supplementary services
according to the obtained calling number.
z The so-called “legal” means that the route selection code (CODE_1) of this number in the PRA
subscriber data table can be obtained. Take the default calling number of the first trunk group
controlled by the signaling link as the subscriber number analysis to obtain another route number
(CODE_2). If CODE_1=CODE_2, the calling number is “legal/valid”, and the trunk group is taken as
the route selection trunk group. If CODE1!=CODE2, take the default calling number of the second
trunk group controlled by the signaling link as the subscriber number analysis to obtain CODE_2.
Perform the processing same as the above. If all the trunk groups controlled by the signaling link
(one PRA signaling link controls five trunk groups at most) do not meet the requirements, they are
illegal.

2-8
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

II. SPM PRA link configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SPMPRALNK Add an SPM PRA link
MOD SPMPRALNK Modify an SPM PRA link
LST SPMPRALNK List an SPM PRA link
RMV PRALNK Remove an SPM PRA link

2) Main parameters
[SPM frame number], [CPC slot number], [in-card link number]

These parameters specify one SPM PRA signaling link.

[interface frame number], [ ET16/STU slot number], [in-card E1/T1 number], [circuit of
E1/T1 ]

These parameters specify one SPM E1 circuit that carries the link information
specified by the above parameters. At present it is set to the time slot 16 of each
E1/T1 in the trunk system.

[network check flag]

If it is “No”, the real calling number will be transmitted transparently. If “Yes”, the
calling number will be the corresponding PRA default number of the selected trunk
group. Generally it is set to “Yes”.

Note:
To add an SPM PRA link, first configure SPM module data, SPM frame data and CPC data. In the CPC
configuration data, specify the link type to PRA.

2.4 PRA Trunk Group Configuration

I. SM PRA trunk group configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD PRATG Add a PRA trunk group
MOD PRATG Modify a PRA trunk group

2-9
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Command name Command function

RMV TG Remove a trunk group
LST TG Display trunk groups

2) Main parameters
[trunk group]

The range is 0-65535. They are numbered globally and must be unique. It is
referenced by the PRA trunk circuit data.

[signaling link]

It is the signaling number of the trunk group. It directly references the corresponding
parameter of the PRA link data.

[sub-route number]

It is the sub-route corresponding to the route of the default calling number of the trunk
group. It directly references the corresponding parameter of the sub-route data.

[module]

It is the module number of the PRA trunk group. It directly references the
corresponding parameter of the PRA subscriber data.

[default caller number]

It is the relevant PRA subscriber number and cannot be Analog Subscriber Line (ASL)
or DSL subscriber number. It directly references the corresponding parameter of the
PRA subscriber data.

[signaling type]

Select either “network side” or “subscriber side” for the PRA. It should be negotiated
with the peer end. If one side is “network side” or ”subscriber side”, the opposite side
should be “subscriber side” or ”network side”. Generally if the peer equipment is a
gateway or PBX, set it to "network side".

Note:
The LPRA board of the SM supports either the network side or subscriber side. The CPC_PRA board of
the SPM, the V5PRA board of the SM and SPM supports only the network side.

[CLI provision mode]

2-10
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Select the “Default number” generally.

Note:
In the trunk mode, the provision mode of the calling number of the PRA trunk group should be set
to ”default number” instead of “trunk line ID”. Otherwise the trunk mode will be invalid.

[charging source code]

It is unused temporarily, and should be set to “No” (default value).

Note:
z The PRA default number controls the PRA port characteristics, such as number of available
channels, call-in authority and call-out authority. Select desired routes through the control of the
voice circuit selection.
z The PRA default subscriber number should be an existing PRA subscriber number. The subscriber
route selection code should be in consistent with the route number of this number obtained from the
called analysis.
z It is through the default number, not the trunk group, that the PRA controls the call-in/call-out
authority.

II. SPM PRA trunk group configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SPMPRATG Add an SPM PRA trunk group
MOD SPMPRATG Modify an SPM PRA trunk group
RMV TG Remove a trunk group
LST TG Display trunk groups

2) Main parameters
[SPM frame number], [CPC slot number], [in-card link number]

These parameters specify the position of one SPM link corresponding to the trunk
group.

For the meanings of other parameters, refer to I. SM PRA trunk group configuration.

2-11
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

III. V5 PRA trunk group configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD V5PRATG Add a V5 PRA trunk group
MOD V5PRATG Modify a V5 PRA trunk group
RMV TG Remove a trunk group
LST TG Display trunk groups

2) Main parameters
See I. SM PRA trunk group configuration.

2.5 PRA Trunk Circuit Configuration

I. SM PRA trunk circuit configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD PRATKC Add PRA trunk circuits
MOD PRATKC Modify PRA trunk circuits
RMV TKC Remove trunk circuits
LST TKC Display trunk circuits

2) Main parameters
[trunk group]

It directly references the corresponding parameter of the PRA trunk group.

[start trunk circuit], [end trunk circuit]

They specify the range of a batch of PRA trunk circuits. At one time at most 32 circuits
can be added and they should be in a PCM system.

Note:
It is recommended that one trunk group only holds one PCM system.
To add trunk circuits, first define the corresponding equipment and ensure that the equipment type is
“PRA”.

2-12
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

II. SPM PRA trunk circuit configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SPMPRATKC Add SPM PRA trunk circuits
MOD SPMPRATKC Modify SPM PRA trunk circuits
RMV TKC Remove trunk circuits
LST TKC Display trunk circuits

2) Main parameters
[interface frame number], [ET16/STU slot number], [in-card E1/T1 number]

These parameters specify the position of one SPM E1.

For the meanings of other parameters, refer to I. SM PRA trunk circuit configuration.

2.6 PCM Port Configuration

I. SM PCM attribute configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD PCMATR Add PCM attributes
MOD PCMATR Modify PCM attributes
RMV PCMATR Remove PCM attributes
LST PCMATR Query PCM attributes

2) Main parameters
[signaling link number]

Specify it if one link can control multiple PCM ports.

[interface identifier]

If one link can control multiple PCM ports, the PCM number of the link is used through
the identifier definition. In the interconnection, the PRA interface identifiers of both
sides should be consistent.

II. PCM of SPM E1 configuration

1) Relevant commands

2-13
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Command name Command function

ADD SPME1 Add an SPM E1 port
MOD SPME1 Modify an SPM E1 port
RMV SPME1 Remove an SPM E1 port
LST SPME1 Query an SPM E1 port

2) Main parameters
[SPM frame number], [CPC slot number], [in-card link number]

These three parameters specify a unique PRA link of the SPM.

[interface identifier]

If one link can control multiple PCM ports, the PCM number of the link is used by the
identifier definition. In the interconnection, the PRA interface identifiers of both sides
should be consistent.

2.7 Examples

2.7.1 Configuring SM PRA Trunk Data

I. Example

1) Basic data
Configure one PRA trunk to access the 163 access server. The PRA trunk is
configured in the SM, occupying four E1 ports. For the sake of security, configure two
DT boards (logically configured as PRA) and two LPRA boards.

Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5 show the hardware configuration.

Front panel of the 1 2

2 7
DT frame 6 1
P D W D P
W T T T W
C F F C
3 4
WT: Wiring trough

Figure 2-4 Boards in the DT frame

2-14
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Front panel of the 1

2
control frame 8
P N N N E M L L P
P
W O O O M P R P W
B B
C D D D A U C C A R C
N N
K K A
E E
P S S M V V
T T
W I I P
C G G U

Figure 2-5 Boards in the control frame

According to Figure 2-4, the two DTF boards are in slots 5 and 7, and the board
numbers are 3 and 4. The trunk circuit numbers are respectively 192-255, 256-319.
According to Figure 2-5, the two LPRA boards are in slots 17, 18. The link numbers
are respectively 32-63, 64-95 (but only first eight or four links are valid).

After negotiation of both parties, select the DSS1 network side for the exchange side.
2) Preset conditions
z The trunk frame and relevant PRA trunk board have been configured, and
relevant boards are working normally.
z The module number in the exchange is 85.
z The LPRA boards have been configured in the specified slots and relevant
boards are working normally.
z The charging data with charging source code 12 and charging selection code 13
has been configured.

II. Procedures

No. Command name Command function

1 ADD CALLSRC Add call source*
2 ADD OFC Add office direction*
3 ADD SRT Add subroute*
4 ADD RT Add route*
5 ADD RTANA Add route analysis*
6 ADD DNSEG Add number segment*
7 ADD ISDNDAT Add ISDN index
8 ADD PRA Add PRA subscriber
9 ADD CNACLD Add call prefix*

2-15
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

No. Command name Command function

10 ADD PRALNK Add PRA link
11 ADD PRATG Add PRA trunk group
12 ADD PRATKC Add PRA trunk circuit

Note:
“*” indicates that you can refer to the Office Data Volume or the Subscriber Data Volume of the C&C08
Digital SPC Switching System – Operation Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands.

III. Configuration

1) Add or modify a call source.

z Query call sources.
LST CALLSRC:;

According to the catogories of call sources, decide whether to add a new call source.
If a new call source is required, select a proper call source code. Suppose the call
source code “0” is unused here.
z Add a call source.
Add a call source. The call source code is “0”, the "prereceive number digits" is “3”
and the DN Set is “0”.

ADD CALLSRC: CSC=0, PRDN=3,P=0;

Here, the parameter CSC stands for the call source code, which is mandatory and will
be referenced by the PRA trunk group data.

PRDN stands for pre-receive number digits.

P stands for the DN set, which will be referenced by the relevant parameter of the
number segment data.

In this command, the route selection source code RSSC adopts the default value “0”.
It will be referenced by the corresponding parameter of the route analysis data.
2) Add an office direction.
z Query office directions.
LST OFC:

Query office directions to find an unused office direction. Here suppose the office
direction “12” is unused.
z Add an office direction.

2-16
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Add an office direction. The office direction number is “12” and the office direction title
is “PRA_1”. The type and level of the opposite exchange are optional parameters.

ADD OFC: O=12, ON="PRA_1", DOT=CMPX, DOL=SAME;

Where, O stands for office direction number, which will be referenced by the sub-route
data; ON stands for the office direction title; DOT for the opposite exchange type and
DOL for the opposite exchange level.

Note:
In the PRA configuration, the office direction data is not meaningful. Only one is enough. If an existing
office direction number is used, the accuracy of the traffic statistics of relevant office direction may be
affected.

3) Add a sub-route.
z Query sub-routes.
LST SRT:

Query sub-routes to find an unused sub-route number. Here suppose the sub-route
“6” is unused.
z Add a sub-route.
Add a sub-route. The sub-route number is “6”, the office direction is “12”, and the
sub-route name is ”SUBROUTE_1”. The sub-route and office direction are mandatory
parameters.

ADD SRT: SRC=6, O=12, SRN="SUBROUTE_1";

Where, SRC stands for the sub-route number, which will be referenced by the route
data and PRA trunk group data; SRN stands for the sub-route name; O stands for the
office direction, which directly references the corresponding parameter in the office
direction data.
4) Add a route.
z Query routes
LST RT:

Query routes to find an unused route number. Here suppose the route “7” is unused.
z Add a route.
The route number is “7” and the first sub-route is “6”.

ADD RT: R =7, SR1=6;

2-17
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Where, R stands for the route number and will be referenced by the route analysis
data; SR1 stands for the first sub-route number, which directly references the
corresponding parameter in the sub-route data.
5) Add route analysis.
z Query route analysis.
LST RTANA:

Query route analysis to find an unused route selection code. Here suppose the route
selection code “4” is unused.
z Add route analysis.
Add one route analysis record. The route selection code is “4” and the route selection
source code is “0”. Select "All categories" for the "Caller category" parameter, the
"Address information indicator" parameter, the "Caller access" parameter and the
"Transmission capacity" parameter. The time index is “0”, the route number is “7”, and
the "ISUP as prior" is "No change". All the parameters are mandatory. Type the
following command.

ADD RTANA: RSC=4, RSSC=0, RUT=ALL, ADI=ALL, CLR=ALL, TP=ALL, TMX=0,

R=7, ISUP=NOCHANGE;

Where, RSC stands for the route selection code, which will be referenced by the call
prefix;

RSSC stands for the route selection source code, which directly references the
corresponding parameter of the call source data.

RUT stands for the caller category; ADI for the address information indicator; CLR for
the caller access; TP for the transmission capacity;

MX stands for the time index and is 0 here; ISUP stands for that ISUP is preferred;

R stands for the route number, which directly references the corresponding parameter
in the route data.
6) Add a number segment.
z Query number segments.
LST DNSEG:

Query number segments to check if the number segment "163" is defined. Here
suppose the number segment "163" is not defined.
z Add a number segment.
ADD DNSEG: P=0, SDN=K'163, EDN=K'163, IDX=30001;

Where, P stands for DN set, which directly references the corresponding parameter in
the call source data.
7) Add ISDN data.

2-18
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

z Query ISDN data.

LST ISDNDAT:

Query ISDN index to check if the ISDN data with a maximum of 30 B-channels exist. If
the data exists, check whether the relevant parameter is suitable or not. If not, carry
out the MOD ISDNDAT command to modify it. If the required data does not exist, the
ISDN index 1 is unused.
z Add ISDN data.
Add ISDN data. The ISDN index is “1”. Set the "Packet accessing" parameter to "B
channel access", the "Max.B channel number" parameter to 30. Here only the "ISDN
index" parameter is mandatory. Type the following command.

ADD ISDNDAT: ISDNX=1, PMF=BS, BCHN=30;

Where, ISDNX stands for the ISDN index, which will be referenced by the PRA
subscriber data;

PMF stands for the packet accessing; BCHN stands for the maximum number of
B-channels.

Select the default values for other parameters.

8) Add a PRA subscriber.
The telephone number is “163”, the DN set is “0”, the route selection code is “4”, the
ISDN index number is “1”, the module number is “85”, the charging source code is
“12” and the supplementary service is “direct dial-in” and "CLIP". Here all parameters
are mandatory except the parameters "DN set" and "Supplementary service".

ADD PRA: D=K`163, P=0, RTSL=4, ISDNX=1, MN=85, RCHS=12,

NS=DDI-1&CLIP-1;

Where, D stands for the telephone number, which will be referenced by the PRA trunk
group;

P stands for the DN set, which should be consistent with the corresponding parameter
of the call source data;

RTSL stands for the route selection code, which directly references the corresponding
parameter of the call prefix data;

ISDNX stands for the ISDN index, which directly references the corresponding
parameter of the ISDN data;

MN stands for the module number;

RCHS stands for the charging source code, which directly references the
corresponding parameter of the preset condition in the example;

NS stands for the supplementary service.

2-19
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

9) Add a call prefix.

z Query call prefixes.
LST CNACLD:

Query call prefixes to check whether the call prefix with the call prefix 163 exists. If it
exists, check whether the service attribute, the minimum number length, the
maximum number length and the charging selection code are proper. If it does not
exist, carry out the MOD CNACLD command to change them. Here suppose the
required call prefix does not exist.
z Add a call prefix.
Add a call prefix. The call prefix is “163”, the service attribute is “local”, the minimum
number length is “4”, the maximum number length is “11”, the route selection code is
“4”, and the charging selection code is “13”. Among the above parameters, the call
prefix, the minimum number length, the maximum number length and the charging
selection code are mandatory. Other parameters are optional. For route analysis,
however, the service category, service attribute and route selection code are
indispensable. Type the following command.

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'163, CSTP=BASE, RSC=4, CSA=LC, MINL=4, MAXL=11,

CHSC=13;

Where, PFX stands for the call prefix; CSTP for the service category, which is set to
“basic service” here;

CSA stands for the service attribute;

MINL for the minimum number length and MAXL for the maximum number length
(Generally MINL is one digit longer than the call prefix and MAXL is equal to the sum
of the length of the call prefix and the length of the telephone number);

CHSC stands for the charging selection code, which directly references the
corresponding data of the preset condition in the example;

RSC stands for the route selection number, which directly references the
corresponding parameter in the route analysis data.
10) Add signaling links.
z Add signaling links.
According to the basic data, Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5, the board numbers of the two
DTF boards are “3” and “4”. The D-channel signaling is carried in the time slot 16 of
the E1. Therefore, the corresponding circuit numbers are respectively 208, 240, 272
and 304. Select the first two links of LPRA boards for the LPRA signaling links.

ADD PRALNK: MN=85, SLN=32, SCN=208;

ADD PRALNK: MN=85, SLN=33, SCN=240;

2-20
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

ADD PRALNK: MN=85, SLN=64, SCN=272;

ADD PRALNK: MN=85, SLN=65, SCN=304;

Where, MN stands for the module number, SLN for link number, SCN for signaling
circuit number, which should be the time slot 16 of relevant PCM.
z Query signaling links.
LST PRALNK:
PRA link:
--------
module signaling link number signaling circuit number network check flag
caller number change index

85 32 208 No No change
85 33 240 No No change
85 64 272 No No change
85 65 304 No No change
(Result number = 4)
11) Add a trunk group.
z Query PRA trunk groups.
LST TG:

Query trunk groups to select a trunk number currently unused. Here suppose the
trunk group numbers 20-23 are unused.
z Add PRA trunk groups.
The trunk group numbers are respectively "20", "21", ""22" and "23". The sub-route
number is “6”, the module number is "85", the signaling link numbers are "32", "33",
"64" and "65" respectively, the default caller number is “163”, and the PRA trunk group
titles are ”PraTG01” to ”PraTG04”.

ADD PRATG: TG=20, SRC=6, MN=85, SL=32, CDFT=K'163, SAT=NET,

TGN="PraTG01";

ADD PRATG: TG=21, SRC=6, MN=85, SL=33, CDFT=K'163, SAT=NET,

TGN="PraTG02";

ADD PRATG: TG=22, SRC=6, MN=85, SL=64, CDFT=K'163, SAT=NET,

TGN="PraTG03";

ADD PRATG: TG=23, SRC=6, MN=85, SL=65, CDFT=K'163, SAT=NET,

TGN="PraTG04";

Where, TG stands for the PRA trunk group number; MN for module number;

2-21
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

SRC stands for the sub-route number, which directly references the corresponding
parameter of the sub-route data;

SL stands for the signaling link number, which directly references the corresponding
parameter of the PRA signaling link data;

CDFT stands for the default caller number, which directly references the
corresponding parameter of the PRA subscriber data.

The parameters "Signaling type" and "Call source" are set to the default values. The
default signaling type is “DSS1 network side". The default call source code is “0” and
it directly references the corresponding parameter of the call source data.
z Query PRA trunk groups.
LST TG:

Part of the results is as follows:

Other trunk group
-----------------
Group number Title Circuit type Group direction Sub-route number
1 No1ToCYL DT Bidirectional trunk 1
20 PraTG01 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
21 PraTG02 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
22 PraTG03 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
23 PraTG04 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
51 NoNameNo1TKGRP DT Outgoing trunk 51
52 NoNameNo1TKGRP DT Incoming trunk 52
(Result number = 7)
--- END
12) Add PRA trunk circuits.
z Add PRA trunk circuits.
Add PRA trunk circuits. The module number is “85”. The trunk group numbers are
respectively 20, 21, 22 and 23. The start circuit numbers are 192, 224, 256 and 288.
The end circuit numbers are respectively 223, 255, 287 and 319.

ADD PRATKC: MN=85, TG=20, STRC=192, ENDC=223;

ADD PRATKC: MN=85, TG=21, STRC=224, ENDC=255;

ADD PRATKC: MN=85, TG=22, STRC=256, ENDC=287;

ADD PRATKC: MN=85, TG=23, STRC=288, ENDC=319;

Where, MN stands for the module number;

TG for the trunk group number, which directly references the corresponding
parameter of the PRA trunk group data;

2-22
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

STRC stands for the start circuit number;

ENDC stands for the end circuit number, which is determined by the basic data in the
example.
z Query PRA trunk circuits.
LST TKC: MN=85;
Circuit distribution
--------------------
Module Start circuit End circuit Trunk group Circuit type

85 192 223 20 PRA

85 224 255 21 PRA
85 256 287 22 PRA
85 288 319 23 PRA

(Result number = 4)
--- END

2.7.2 Configuring SPM PRA Trunk Data

I. Example

1) Basic data
Configure one PRA trunk to access the 163 server. The PRA trunk is configured in the
SPM, occupying four E1 ports. For the sake of security, configure two ET16 boards
and two CPC boards. The ET16 board in Slot 5 occupies the last two E1 ports, and
the ET16 board in Slot 6 occupies the first two E1 ports. Each CPC board is allocated
with the first two links.

Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-7 show the hardware configuration.

2 5 6 Front panel of the LIM frame

P E E Q Q P
T T
W S S W
1 1
C 6 6 I I C

Figure 2-6 Boards in the 163 service interface frame

2-23
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

2 6 Front panel of the SPM frame 21 22

P S S B B C C P
C C P P
W P P C C C C W
C C C C

Figure 2-7 Boards in the SPM frame

2) Preset conditions
z The LIM interface frame 4 has been configured and the relevant ET16 boards
work normally.
z The SPM has been configured in the SPM frame 20 and relevant Service
Processing Boards (SPC) work normally.
z The frame number and slot number of the MHI board connected to the CPC
board are respectively 16 and 2. The 6# connector of the MHI board is connected
to the CPC board. The MHI board provides 2 Mbit/s HWs.
z Charging data is configured, whose corresponding charging source code is 12
and charging selection code is 13.

II. Procedures

No. Command name Command function

1 ADD CPCCFG Add CPC configuration*
2 ADD SPME1 Add SPM E1 in batch*
3 ADD CALLSRC Add call source*
4 ADD OFC Add office direction*
5 ADD SRT Add subroute*
6 ADD RT Add route*
7 ADD RTANA Add route analysis*
8 ADD DNSEG Add number segment *
9 ADD ISDNDAT Add ISDN data
10 ADD PRA Add PRA data
11 ADD CNACLD Add call prefix*
12 ADD SPMPRALNK Add SPM PRA link
13 ADD SPMPRATG Add SPM PRA trunk group
14 ADD SPMPRATKC Add SPM PRA trunk circuit
15 MNT BRD Activate board*

2-24
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Note:
“*” indicates that you can refer to other volume of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands.

III. Configuration

1) Configure the PRA protocol board.

According to Figure 2-6, Figure 2-7 and relevant data, the SPM frame number is “20”,
SPM module number is “11”, CPC slot numbers are “21” and “22”, and the MHI frame
number and slot number are respectively “16” and “2”. According to the preset
conditions, the connector of the MHI board is 6#. From Table 2-1, or Table 2-2, the
start HW numbers are respectively “28” and “29”.

ADD CPCCFG: FN=20, BN=21, MN=11, LKT=PRA, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2, SHW=28;

ADD CPCCFG: FN=20, BN=22, MN=11, LKT=PRA, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2, SHW=29;

Note:
The start HW number is determined by the HW connector of the MHI board. The HW numbers in the pure
2 Mbit/s mode are as shown in Table 2-1, and those in the hybrid mode are as shown in Table 2-2.

Table 2-1 HW numbers in the pure 2 Mbit/s mode

Connector
0# 1# 2# 3# 4# 5# 6# 7#
position
HW
16, 17 18, 19 20, 21 22, 23 24, 25 26, 27 28, 29 30, 31
number

Table 2-2 HW numbers in the hybrid mode

Connector
0# 1# 2# 3# 4# 5# 6# 7#
position
HW
24, 25 26, 27 28, 29 30, 31
number

2) Configure SPM E1 data.

2-25
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

According to Figure 2-6, Figure 2-7 and relevant data, the interface frame number is
“4”, the SPM module number is “11”, and the E1 device type is “PRA”. If the slot
number is “5”, the start E1 number is “14” and the end E1 number is “15”. If the slot
number is “6”, the start E1 number is “0” and the end E1 number is “1”. The signal
mode is “CCS” (common channel mode).

ADD SPME1: FN=4, BN=5, SN=14, EN=15, MN=11, DID=PRA, MOD=CCS;

ADD SPME1: FN=4, BN=6, SN=0, EN=1, MN=11, DID=PRA, MOD=CCS;

Where, FN stands for the frame number, BN for slot number, SN for start E1 number,
EN for end E1 number, DID for E1 device type, and MOD for signal mode.
3) Add or modify a call source.
z Query call sources.
LST CALLSRC:

According to the catogories of call sources, decide whether to add a new call source.
If a new call source is required, select a proper call source code. Suppose the call
source code “0” is unused here.
z Add a call source.
The call source code is “0”, the DN set is “0”, and the "prereceive number digits" is 3.
Type the following command.

ADD CALLSRC: CSC=0, PRDN=3, P=0;

Where, CSC stands for the call source code, which is mandatory and will be
referenced by the PRA trunk group data;

PRDN stands for the prereceive number digits;

P stands for the DN set, which will be referenced by the relevant parameter of the
number segment data.

In this command, the route selection source code RSSC adopts the default value “0”.
It will be referenced by the corresponding parameter of the route analysis data.
4) Add an office direction.
z Query office directions.
LST OFC:

Query office directions to find an unused office direction. Here suppose the office
direction “12” is unused.
z Add an office direction.
Add an office direction. The office direction number is “12” and the office direction title
is “PRA_1”. The type and level of the opposite exchange are optional parameters.

ADD OFC: O=12, ON="PRA_1", DOT=CMPX, DOL=SAME;

2-26
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Where, O stands for the office direction number, which will be referenced by the
sub-route data; ON stands for the office direction title; DOT for the opposite exchange
type and DOL for the opposite exchange level.

Note:
In the PRA configuration, the office direction data has no practical meaning. Only the configuration of
one piece of data is enough. If an existing office direction number is used, the accuracy of the traffic
statistics of relevant office direction will be affected negatively.

5) Add a sub-route.
z Query sub-routes.
LST SRT:

Query sub-routes to find an unused sub-route number. Here suppose the sub-route
“6” is unused.
z Add a sub-route.
The sub-route number is “6”, the office direction number is “12”, and the sub-route title
is ”SUBROUTE_1”. The sub-route and office direction number are mandatory
parameters.

ADD SRT: SRC=6, O=12, SRN="SUBROUTE_1";

Where, SRC stands for the sub-route number, which will be referenced by the route
data; SRN stands for the sub-route title; O stands for the office direction, which
directly references the corresponding parameter in the office direction data.
6) Add a route.
z Query routes.
LST RT:

Query routes to find an unused route number. Here suppose the route “7” is unused.
z Add a route.
The route number is “7” and the first sub-route number is “6”. These two parameters
are mandatory.

ADD RT: R =7, SR1=6;

Where, R stands for the route number and will be referenced by the route analysis
data; SR1 stands for the first sub-route number, which directly references the
corresponding parameter in the sub-route data.
7) Add route analysis.

2-27
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

z Query route analysis.

LST RTANA:

Query route analysis to find an unused route selection code. Here suppose the route
selection code “4” is unused.
z Add route analysis.
Add one route analysis record. The route selection code is “4” and the route selection
source code is “0”. Select "All categories" for the "Caller category" parameter, the
"Address information indicator" parameter, the "Caller access" parameter and the
"Transmission capacity" parameter. The time index is “0”, the route number is “7”, and
the "ISUP as prior" is "No change". All the parameters are mandatory. Type the
following command.

ADD RTANA: RSC=4, RSSC=0, RUT=ALL, ADI=ALL, CLR=ALL, TP=ALL, TMX=0,

R=7, ISUP=NOCHANGE;

Where, RSC stands for the route selection code, which will be referenced by the call
prefix;

RSSC stands for the route selection source code, which directly references the
corresponding parameter of the call source data.

RUT stands for the caller category; ADI for the address information indicator; CLR for
the caller access; TP for the transmission capacity;

MX stands for the time index and is 0 here; ISUP stands for that ISUP is preferred;

R stands for the route number, which directly references the corresponding parameter
in the route data.
8) Add a number segment.
z Query number segments.
LST DNSEG:

Query number segments to check if the number segment "163" is defined. Here
suppose the number segment "163" is not defined.
z Add a number segment.
ADD DNSEG: P=0, SDN=K'163, EDN=K'163, IDX=30001;

Where, P stands for DN set, which directly references the corresponding parameter in
the call source data.
9) Add ISDN data.
z Query ISDN data.
LST ISDNDAT:

2-28
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Query ISDN data to check if the ISDN data with a maximum of 30 B-channels exist. If
the data exists, check whether the relevant parameter is suitable or not. If not, carry
out the MOD ISDNDAT command to modify it. Here suppose the required data does
not exist, and the ISDN index “1” is unused.
z Add ISDN data.
Add ISDN data. The ISDN index is “1”. Set the "Packet accessing" parameter to "B
channel access", the "Max.B channel number" parameter to 30. Here only the "ISDN
index" parameter is mandatory. Type the following command.

ADD ISDNDAT: ISDNX=1, PMF=BS, BCHN=30;

Where, ISDNX stands for the ISDN index, which will be referenced by the PRA
subscriber data;

PMF stands for the packet accessing; BCHN stands for the maximum number of
B-channels.

Select the default values for other parameters.

10) Add a PRA subscriber.
The telephone number is “163”, the DN set is “0”, the route selection code is “4”, the
ISDN index number is “1”, the module number is “11”, the charging source code is
“12” and the supplementary service is “DDI” and "CLIP". Here all parameters are
mandatory except the parameters "DN set" and "Supplementary service".

ADD PRA: D=K`163, P=0, RTSL=4, ISDNX=1, MN=11, RCHS=12,

NS=DDI-1&CLIP-1;

Where, D stands for the telephone number, which will be referenced by the PRA trunk
group;

P stands for the DN set, which should be consistent with the corresponding parameter
of the call source data;

RTSL stands for the route selection code, which directly references the corresponding
parameter of the call prefix data;

ISDNX stands for the ISDN index, which directly references the corresponding
parameter of the ISDN data;

MN stands for the module number;

RCHS stands for the charging source code, which directly references the
corresponding parameter of the preset condition in the example;

NS stands for the supplementary service.

11) Add a call prefix.
z Query call prefixes.

2-29
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

LST CNACLD:

Query call prefixes to check whether the call prefix with the call prefix 163 exists. If it
exists, check whether the service attribute, the minimum number length, the
maximum number length and the charging selection code are proper. If it does not
exist, carry out the MOD CNACLD command to change them. Here suppose the
required call prefix does not exist.
z Add a call prefix.
Add a call prefix according to the access code of the Internet Service Provider (ISP)
server. The call prefix is “163”, the service category is "basic service", the service
attribute is “local”, the minimum number length is “4”, the maximum number length is
“11”, the route selection code is “4”, and the charging selection code is “13”. Among
the above parameters, the call prefix, the minimum number length, the maximum
number length and the charging selection code are mandatory. Other parameters are
optional. For route analysis, however, the service category, service attribute and route
selection code are indispensable. Type the following command.

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'163, CSTP=BASE, RSC=4, CSA=LC, MINL=4, MAXL=11,

CHSC=13;

Where, PFX stands for the call prefix; CSTP for the service category; CSA stands for
the service attribute;

MINL for the minimum number length and MAXL for the maximum number length
(Generally MINL is one digit longer than the call prefix and MAXL is equal to the sum
of the length of the call prefix and the length of the telephone number);

CHSC stands for the charging selection code, which directly references the
corresponding data of the preset condition in the example;

RSC stands for the route selection number, which directly references the
corresponding parameter in the route analysis data.
12) Add signaling links.
z Add signaling links.
According to the CPC configuration data, SPM E1 configuration data and basic data,
the slot numbers of the two ET16 boards are “5” and “6”. The PRA D-channel
signaling is carried in the time slot 16 of the corresponding E1. Select the last two E1s
of the ET16 board in Slot 5 and the first two E1s of the ET16 board in Slot 6. Select the
first two links of the CPC boards for the PRA link numbers.

ADD SPMPRALNK: FN=20, BN=21, BSN=0, LIMFN=4, EBN=5, EN=14, C=16;

ADD SPMPRALNK: FN=20, BN=21, BSN=1, LIMFN=4, EBN=5, EN=15, C=16;

ADD SPMPRALNK: FN=20, BN=22, BSN=0, LIMFN=4, EBN=6, EN=0, C=16;

2-30
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

ADD SPMPRALNK: FN=20, BN=22, BSN=1, LIMFN=4, EBN=6, EN=1, C=16;

Where, FN stands for the SPM frame number, BN for the CPC slot number, BSN for
the in-card link number, LIMFN for the interface frame number, EBN for the ET16 slot
number, EN for THE in-card E1 number, and C for the circuit number of E1.
z Query signaling links.
LST SPMPRALNK: F=20;
PRA link:
--------
Frame number Slot number In-card link number module signaling link number
network check flag caller number change index
20 21 0 11 32 No No change
20 21 1 11 33 No No change
20 22 0 11 64 No No change
20 22 1 11 65 No No change

(Result number = 4)
PRA link:
--------
Frame number Slot number In-card link number interface frame number
ET16/STU slot number in-card E1/T1 number circuit of E1/T1
20 21 0 4 5 14 16
20 21 1 4 5 15 16
20 22 0 4 6 0 16
20 22 1 4 6 1 16
(Result number = 4)
--- END
13) Add trunk groups.
z Query PRA trunk groups.
LST TG:

Query trunk groups to select a trunk number currently unused. Here suppose the
trunk group numbers 20-23 are unused.
z Add SPM PRA trunk groups.
The trunk group numbers are respectively "20", "21", ""22" and "23". The sub-route
number is “6”. Select the first two links of the CPC boards as the signaling links. The
default caller number is “163” and the PRA trunk group titles are ”PraTG01”
to ”PraTG04”. Select the default values for other parameters.

ADD SPMPRATG: TG=20, SRC=6, F=20, BN=21, BSN=0, CDFT=K'163,

TGN="PraTG01";

2-31
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

ADD SPMPRATG: TG=21, SRC=6, F=20, BN=21, BSN=1, CDFT=K'163,

TGN="PraTG02";

ADD SPMPRATG: TG=22, SRC=6, F=20, BN=22, BSN=0, CDFT=K'163,

TGN="PraTG03";

ADD SPMPRATG: TG=23, SRC=6, F=20, BN=22, BSN=1, CDFT=K'163,

TGN="PraTG04";

Where, TG stands for the PRA trunk group number; TGN for the PRA trunk group title;
MN for the module number;

SRC stands for the sub-route number, which directly references the corresponding
parameter of the sub-route data;

F stands for the SPM frame number; BN for the CPC slot number; BSN for the in-card
link number (These parameters directly reference the corresponding parameters of
the SPMPRA link data);

CDFT stands for the default caller number, which directly references the
corresponding parameter of the PRA subscriber data.

The parameters "Signaling type" and "Call source" are set to the default values. The
default signaling type is “DSS1 network side". The default call source code is “0” and
it directly references the corresponding parameter of the call source data.
z Query PRA trunk groups.
LST TG:

Part of the results is as follows:

Other trunk group
-----------------
Group number Title Circuit type Group direction Sub-route number
1 No1ToCYL DT Bidirectional trunk 1
20 PraTG01 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
21 PraTG02 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
22 PraTG03 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
23 PraTG04 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
51 NoNameNo1TKGRP DT Outgoing trunk 51
52 NoNameNo1TKGRP DT Incoming trunk 52
(Result number = 7)
--- END
14) Add PRA trunk circuits.
z Add PRA trunk circuits.
The trunk group numbers are respectively 20, 21, 22 and 23. The circuits in an E1 is
from 0 to 31.

2-32
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

ADD SPMPRATKC: FN=4, BN=5, EN=14, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20;

ADD SPMPRATKC: FN=4, BN=5, EN=15, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=21;

ADD SPMPRATKC: FN=4, BN=6, EN=0, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=22;

ADD SPMPRATKC: FN=4, BN=6, EN=1, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=23;

Where, TG stands for the trunk group number, which directly references the
corresponding parameter of the PRA trunk group data;

FN stands for the interface frame number; BN for the ET16 slot number; EN for the
in-card E1 number (These parameters directly reference the corresponding
parameters in Figure 2-6 and the SPM E1 data);

SCN stands for the E1 start circuit number; ECN for the E1 end circuit number (The
data is available in the basic data in the example).
z Query PRA trunk circuits.
LST TKC: MN=11;
Circuit distribution
--------------------
Module Start circuit End circuit Trunk group Circuit type
11 192 223 20 PRA
11 224 255 21 PRA
11 256 287 22 PRA
11 288 319 23 PRA

(Result number = 4)
--- END
z Query trunk parameters.
The above trunk circuit parameters are logical parameters, which are inconsistent
with the input data of the SPM PRA trunk circuit configuration. Carry out the LST
TKPHY command to obtain the trunk physical parameters. In the following example,
the SPM logical module is “11” and the trunk circuit number is “192”.

LST TKPHY: LMN=11, LCN=192;

Trunk circuit physical parameter
--------------------------------
Rack number = 4
Place title = NonamePlace
Place number = 0
Line number = 0
Column number = 2
Physical module = 0
Frame number = 4

2-33
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Slot number = 21
In-card E1/T1 number = 14
Channel number in E1/T1 = 0
--- END

Similarly, the physical position of other circuits can be queried.

15) Activate boards.
Activate the configured CPC boards and ET16 boards.

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=4, SN=5, OP=ACT;

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=4, SN=6, OP=ACT;

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=20, SN=21, OP=ACT;

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=20, SN=22, OP=ACT;

Where, MN stands for the module number, F for frame number, SN for slot number,
and OP for operation type.

2.7.3 Adding PRA Trunk Data

I. Example

1) Basic data
Because there are more and more 163 subscribers, four PRA trunks are not enough.
It is necessary to add another two PRA trunks. The hardware structures are as shown
in Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-7.
2) Preset conditions
z There are idle E1s in the ET16 boards, and idle links in the CPC boards for the
application. The CPU occupation ratio of the SPM is relatively low.
z The existing route whose route number is "6" will be used.
z The call source code is consistent with the parameter in the existing subscriber
data. Its value is "0".
z The signaling type is consistent with that of the currently configured PRA trunk. It
is set to "DSS1 network side".

II. Procedures

No. Command name Command function

1 ADD SPME1 Add SPM E1s in batch*
2 ADD SPMPRALNK Add SPM PRA trunk link
3 ADD SPMPRATG Add SPM PRA trunk group
4 ADD SPMPRATKC Add SPM PRA trunk circuit

2-34
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

No. Command name Command function

5 MNT BRD Activate board*

Note:
“*” indicates that you can refer to other volume of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands.

III. Configuration

1) Configure SPM E1 data.

z Query board status.
Query the board status to find the boards that are working normally. Thus, operators
can know the boards that may have idle E1s. Here, set the module number to "0" (it
stands for the AM/CM), the interface frame number to “4” and the board status to
"Normal".

DSP FRM: MN=0, F=4, STS=NOR;

Module 0 frame 4 card status
-------------------------------
Slot number card type Status

1 PWS Normal
5 ET16 Normal
6 ET16 Normal
25 PWS Normal
(Result number = 4)
--END
z Query SPM E1s.
To allocate E1s correctly, first query the E1 utilization of the ET16 boards to find idle
E1s and corresponding module numbers. According to the above results, query the
ET16 boards in slots 5 and 6 of the interface frame 4.

LST SPME1: FN=4, BN=5;

E1/T1 attribute
---------------
Frame number Slot number In-card E1/T1 number SPM module E1/T1 logical
number E1/T1 Device type
4 5 4 25 0 RDT
4 5 5 25 1 RDT

2-35
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

4 5 14 11 0 PRA
4 5 15 11 1 PRA
(result number = 4)
--- END

According to the query results, select 6# and 7# E1s as the PRA trunk circuits. The
module number is “11”.
z Query SPM PRA trunk links.
Query PRA trunk links to check whether the module 11 has idle PRA links.

LST SPMPRALNK:;
PRA link:
--------
Frame number Slot number In-card link number module signaling link number
network check flag caller numner change index
20 21 0 11 32 no no change
20 21 1 11 33 no no change
20 22 0 11 64 no no change
20 22 1 11 65 no no change
(Result number = 4)

PRA link:
--------
Frame number Slot number In-card link number interface frame number
ET16/STU slot number in-card E1/T1 number circuit of E1/T1
20 21 0 4 5 0 16
20 21 1 4 5 1 16
20 22 0 4 6 0 16
20 22 1 4 6 1 16

(Result number = 4)
--- END

According to the query results, the CPC board of the module 11 has idle PRA links.
z Configure SPM E1s.
According to the query results, select the No. 6 and No. 7 E1s for the ET16 board in
Slot 5. The E1 device type is “PRA”, signal mode is “CCS” (common channel mode)
and the E1 module number is “11”.

ADD SPME1: FN=4, BN=5, SN=6, EN=7, MN=11, DID=PRA, MOD=CCS;

Where, FN stands for the interface frame number; BN for the ET16 slot number; SN
for the start E1 number; EN for the end E1 number; DID for the E1 device type and
MOD for the signal mode.

2-36
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

2) Add SPM PRA trunk links.

z Add SPM PRA trunk links.
According to the configured SPM E1s, the PRA trunk circuits are the No. 6 and No. 7
E1s of the ET16 board in Slot 5 of the No. 4 interface frame. According to the query
results of the PRA links, select the No. 2 and No. 3 links in Slot 22 of the No. 20 frame.

ADD SPMPRALNK: FN=20, BN=22, BSN=2, LIMFN=4, EBN=5, EN=6, C=16;

ADD SPMPRALNK: FN=20, BN=22, BSN=3, LIMFN=4, EBN=5, EN=7, C=16;

Where, FN stands for the SPM frame number; BN for the CPC slot number; BSN for
the in-card link number; LIMFN for the interface frame number; EBN for the ET16 slot
number; EN for the in-card E1 number and C for the circuit number of E1.
z Query SPM PRA trunk links.
LST SPMPRALNK:;
PRA link:
--------
Frame number Slot number In-card link number module signaling link number
network check flag caller numner change index
20 21 0 11 32 No No change
20 21 1 11 33 No No change
20 22 0 11 64 No No change
20 22 1 11 65 No No change
20 22 3 11 66 No No change
20 22 4 11 67 No No change
No changeNo changeNo changeNo change
(Result number = 6)
PRA link:
--------
Frame number Slot number In-card link number interface frame number
ET16/STU slot number in-card E1/T1 number circuit of E1/T1
20 21 0 4 5 0 16
20 21 1 4 5 1 16
20 22 0 4 6 0 16
20 22 1 4 6 1 16
20 22 2 4 5 6 16
20 22 3 4 5 7 16

(Result number = 6)
--- END
3) Add PRA trunk groups.
z Query PRA trunk groups.
LST TG:;

2-37
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Query the trunk groups to select currently unused trunk group numbers. Here
suppose the trunk numbers “24” and “25” are unused.
z Add SPM PRA trunk groups.
According to the above results and relevant data, add PRA trunk groups. The PRA
trunk group titles are ”PraTG05” to ”PraTG06”.

ADD SPMPRATG: TG=24, SRC=6, F=20, BN=22, BSN=2, CDFT=K'163,

TGN="PraTG05";

ADD SPMPRATG: TG=25, SRC=6, F=20, BN=22, BSN=3, CDFT=K'163,

TGN="PraTG06";

Where, TG stands for the PRA trunk group number; TGN for the PRA trunk group title;

F stands for the SPM frame number; BN for the CPC slot number; BSN for the in-card
link number (These parameters directly reference the corresponding parameter in the
SPM PRA link data);

SRC stands for the sub-route number;

CDFT stands for the default caller number, which directly references the preset
condition in the example;

The parameters "Signaling type" and "Call source" are set to the default values. The
default signaling type is “DSS1 network side". The default call source code is “0” and
it directly references the preset condition in the example.
z Query PRA trunk groups.
LST TG:;

Part of the results is as follows:

Other trunk group
-----------------
Group number Title Circuit type Group direction Sub-route number
1 No1ToCYL DT Bidirectional trunk 1
20 PraTG01 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
21 PraTG02 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
22 PraTG03 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
23 PraTG04 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
24 PraTG05 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
25 PraTG06 PRA Bidirectional trunk 6
51 NoNameNo1TKGRP DT Outgoing trunk 51
52 NoNameNo1TKGRP DT Incoming trunk 52
(Result number = 9)
--- END
4) Add SPM PRA trunk circuits.

2-38
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

z Add PRA trunk circuits.

The trunk group numbers are respectively “24” and “25”. The circuits of an E1 is from
0 to 31.

ADD SPMPRATKC: FN=4, BN=4, EN=6, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=24;

ADD SPMPRATKC: FN=4, BN=4, EN=7, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=25;

Where, TG stands for the trunk group number, which directly references the
corresponding parameter of the PRA trunk group data;

FN stands for the interface frame number; BN for the ET16 slot number; EN for the
in-card E1 number (These parameters directly reference the corresponding
parameters in the SPM E1 data);

SCN stands for the E1 start circuit number; ECN for the E1 end circuit number (The
data is available in the basic data in the example).
z Query PRA trunk circuits.
LST TKC: MN=11;
Circuit distribution
--------------------
Module Start circuit End circuit Trunk group Circuit type
11 192 223 20 PRA
11 224 255 21 PRA
11 256 287 22 PRA
11 288 319 23 PRA
11 320 351 24 PRA
11 352 383 25 PRA
(Result number = 6)
--- END
z Query trunk parameters.
The above trunk circuit parameters are logical parameters, which are inconsistent
with the input data of the SPM PRA trunk circuit configuration. Carry out the LST
TKPHY command to obtain the trunk physical parameters. In the following example,
the SPM logical module is “11” and the trunk circuit number is “320”.

LST TKPHY: LMN=11, LCN=320;

Trunk circuit physical parameter
--------------------------------
Rack number = 4
Place title = NonamePlace
Place number = 0
Line number = 0
Column number = 2

2-39
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Physical module = 0
Frame number = 4
Slot number = 5
In-card E1/T1 number = 6
Channel number in E1/T1 = 0
--- END

Similarly, the physical position of other circuits can be queried.

5) Activate boards.
Activate the configured CPC boards and ET16 boards.

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=4, SN=5, OP=ACT;

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=20, SN=22, OP=ACT;

Where, MN stands for the module number, F for frame number, SN for slot number,
and OP for operation type.

2.7.4 Modifying PRA Trunk Data

I. Example

1) Basic data
There is one PRA trunk group 20. Here it is required to replace the PCM port and link
with other port and link.
2) Preset conditions
z The exchange runs normally.
z There are idle PRA trunks and links.

II. Procedures

No. Command name Command function

1 LST TG List trunk group*
2 ADD SPME1 Add SPM E1s in batch*
3 ADD SPMPRALNK Add SPM PRA trunk link
4 MOD SPMPRATG Modify SPM PRA trunk group
5 RMV SPMTKC Remove SPM PRA trunk circuit
6 ADD SPMPRATKC Add SPM PRA trunk circuit
7 RMV PRALNK Remove PRA trunk link
8 RMV SPME1 Remove SPM E1*
9 MNT BRD Activate board*

2-40
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Note:
“*” indicates that you can refer to other volume of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands.

III. Configuration

1) Query trunk groups.

z Query trunk groups.
Query trunk groups to find the module number of the PRA trunk group, the PRA trunk
circuits and PRA links to be deleted.

LST TG: TG=20, SC=TRUE, SOT=TRUE;

Circuit distribution
--------------------
Trunk group Start circuit End circuit Module Circuit type
20 0 31 11 PRA

other parameter
--------
signaling link = 64

--- END
z Confirm the physical position of the trunk circuits to be deleted.
According to the above results, query the physical position of the trunk circuit board
with the start circuit number 0 in Module 11.

LST TKPHY: LMN=11, LCN=0;

Trunk circuit physical parameter
--------------------------------
Rack number = 4
Place title = NonamePlace
Place number = 0
Line number = 0
Column number = 2
Physical module = 0
Frame number = 4
Slot number = 5
In-card E1/T1 number = 0
Channel number in E1/T1 = 0
--- END

2-41
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

According to the query result of the PRA trunk group, it is found that the PCM port to
be deleted occupies one E1.
2) Add a batch of E1s.
z Query the board status.
Query the board status to find the boards that are working normally. Here, set the
module number to "0" (it stands for the AM/CM), the interface frame number to “4” and
the board status to "Normal".

DSP FRM: MN=0, F=4, STS=NOR;

Module 0 frame 4 card status
-------------------------------
Slot number card type Status
1 PWS Normal
5 ET16 Normal
6 ET16 Normal
25 PWS Normal
(Result number = 4)
--END
z Query a batch of SPM E1s.
According to the above results, select an ET16 board that works normally. Query a
batch of SPME1s to find the position of idle E1s.

LST SPME1: FN=4, BN=5;

E1/T1 attribute
---------------
Frame number Slot number In-card E1/T1 number SPM module E1/T1 logical number
E1/T1 Device type
4 5 0 11 0 PRA
4 5 1 11 1 PRA
4 5 14 1 6 TUP
4 5 15 1 7 TUP
(Result number = 4)
--- END

According to the result, the ET16 board has idle E1s.

z Query SPM PRA trunk links.
Query PRA trunk links to check whether the module 11 has idle PRA links.

LST SPMPRALNK:;
PRA link:
--------
Frame number Slot number In-card link number module signaling link number
network check flag caller numner change index

2-42
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

20 21 0 11 32 No No change
20 21 1 11 33 No No change
20 22 0 11 64 No No change
20 22 1 11 65 No No change
(Result number = 4)

PRA link:
--------
Frame number Slot number In-card link number interface frame number
ET16/STU slot number in-card E1/T1 number circuit of E1/T1
20 21 0 4 5 0 16
20 21 1 4 5 1 16
20 22 0 4 6 0 16
20 22 1 4 6 1 16

(Result number = 4)
--- END

According to the result, the CPC board in the No. 11 SPM has idle links.
z Add an SPM E1.
According the above results, select “6” as the E1 number.

ADD SPME1: FN=4, BN=5, SN=6, EN=6, MN=11, DID=PRA;

Where, FN stands for the interface frame number; BN for the ET16 slot number; SN
for the start E1 number; EN for the end E1 number; DID for the E1 device type.
3) Add SPM PRA trunk links.
z Add SPM PRA trunk links.
According to the above queried PRA trunk link, select an idle PRA link. Here select the
No. 4 link in Slot 22 of the No. 20 frame. The PRA trunk circuits are the No. 6 E1 of the
ET16 board in Slot 5 of the No. 4 interface frame.

ADD SPMPRALNK: FN=20, BN=22, BSN=4, LIMFN=4, EBN=5, EN=6, C=16;

Where, FN stands for the SPM frame number; BN for the CPC slot number; BSN for
the in-card link number; LIMFN for the interface frame number; EBN for the ET16 slot
number; EN for the in-card E1 number and C for the circuit number of E1.
z Query SPM PRA trunk links.
LST SPMPRALNK;;
PRA link:
--------
Frame number Slot number In-card link number module signaling link number
network check flag caller number change index

2-43
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

20 21 0 11 32 No No change
20 21 1 11 33 No No change
20 22 0 11 64 No No change
20 22 1 11 65 No No change
20 22 4 11 68 No No change
(Result number = 5)

PRA link:
--------
Frame number Slot number In-card link number interface frame number
ET16/STU slot number in-card E1/T1 number circuit of E1/T1
20 21 0 4 5 0 16
20 21 1 4 5 1 16
20 22 0 4 6 0 16
20 22 1 4 6 1 16
20 22 1 4 5 6 16

(Result number = 5)
--- END
4) Modify an SPM PRA trunk group.
Modify the SPM PRA trunk group 20. Change the PRA link to the No. 4 link in Slot 22.

MOD SPMPRATG: TG=20, F=20, BN=22, BSN=4;

Where, TG stands for the trunk group number; F for the SPM frame number; BN for
the CPC slot number; BSN for the in-card link number.
5) Remove SPM PRA trunk circuits.
Through querying the trunk group, it is known that the physical position of the SPM
PRA trunk circuits to be removed is E0 in Slot 5 of Frame 4.

RMV SPMTKC: FN=4, BN=5, EN=0;

6) Add SPM PRA trunk circuits.
According to the above added SPM E1 data, add PRA trunk circuits.

ADD SPMPRATKC: FN=4, BN=5, EN=6, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20;

Where, FN stands for the interface frame number; BN for the ET16 slot number; EN
for the in-card E1 number; SCN for the E1 start circuit number and ECN for the E1 end
circuit number.
7) Remove a PRA signaling link.
Through querying the trunk group, it is known that the link number to be removed is
“64” and its module number is “11”.

RMV PRALNK: MN=11, SLN=64;

2-44
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

8) Remove an SPM E1.

Query the SPME1 data to find the physical position of the E1 to be removed.

RMV SPME1: FN=4, BN=5, SN=0, EN=0;

9) Activate boards.
Activate the configured CPC boards and ET16 boards.

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=4, SN=5, OP=ACT;

MNT BRD: MN=11, F=20, SN=22, OP=ACT;

Where, MN stands for the module number, F for frame number, SN for slot number,
and OP for operation type.

Note:
z If not to modify the PRA link number (the parameters to be modified are not mandatory ones), carry
out the command that modifies the SPMPRA link to achieve the modification.
z If the parameter to be modified is a mandatory one, first create a new record, then modify it in the
superior table to make it point to the new record.
z The operation range of a data modification varies from modified contents. Useless data should be
deleted. During a modification, the continuity of the data in the descending order should be
guaranteed. y If not, there may be much redundant data, which is harmful to the database
maintenance. Refer to general configuration procedures for common methods.
z The modification of sub-routes in the PRA trunk group will involve the modification of the route data.
The modification of the telephone number in the trunk group will involve the modification of the PRA
subscriber data. The modification sequence and method are similar to those in the example.
z The modification procedure of the SM PRA trunk is similar to that of the SPM PRA trunk and so is
omitted here.

2.7.5 Removing PRA Trunk Data

I. Example

1) Basic data
Remove the PRA trunk groups 22 and 23.
2) Preset conditions
z The sub-routes used in the to-be-deleted PRA trunk groups are shared by other
trunk groups.
z The PRA implementation mode adopts the trunk mode.
z ISDN data and the number segment data are shared by other subscribers.

2-45
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

II. Procedures

No. Command name Command function

1 LST TG List trunk group*
2 RMV SPMTKC Remove SPM PRA trunk circuit
3 RMV SPMPRATG Remove SPM PRA trunk group
4 RMV PRALNK Remove PRA trunk link
5 RMV SPME1 Remove SPM E1*
6 RMV PRA Remove PRA subscriber

Note:
“*” indicates that you can refer to other volume of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands.

III. Configuration

1) Query trunk groups.

z Query trunk groups.
Query the trunk group to find the module number, trunk circuit numbers, link numbers
and subscriber numbers of the PRA trunk group.

LST TG: TG=22, SC=TRUE, SOT=TRUE;

The SC is set to ”TRUE”, which means that the circuit layout will be displayed. The
SOT is set to "TRUE", which means that other information will be displayed.
Circuit layout
--------------------
Trunk group Start circuit End circuit Module Circuit type
22 64 95 11 PRA

Other parameter
--------
Signaling link = 64
Default caller number = 8550000
--- END
z Confirm the physical position of the trunk circuits to be deleted.
According to the above results, query the physical position of the trunk circuit board
with the start circuit number "64" in Module 11.

2-46
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

LST TKPHY: LMN=11, LCN=64;

Trunk circuit physical parameter
--------------------------------
Rack number = 4
Place title = NonamePlace
Place number = 0
Line number = 0
Column number = 2
Physical module = 0
Frame number = 4
Slot number = 5
In-card E1/T1 number = 0
Channel number in E1/T1 = 0
--- END

According to the above query results, the physical position is the first E1 of the ET16
board in Slot 6 of the interface frame 4.

Similarly, the physical position of the PRA trunk board of the trunk group 23 is the
second E1 of the ET16 board in Slot 6 of the interface frame 4.
2) Remove SPM PRA trunk circuits.
According to the above result, the physical position of the SPM PRA trunk circuits to
be removed is E0 and E1 in Slot 6 of the frame 4.

RMV SPMTKC: FN=4, BN=5, EN=0;

RMV SPMTKC: FN=4, BN=6, EN=1;

Where, FN stands for the interface frame number; BN for the ET16 slot number; EN
for the in-card E1 number.
3) Remove SPM PRA trunk groups.
RMV TG: TG=22;

RMV TG: TG=23;

4) Remove PRA signaling links.
Query the trunk groups. According to the query results, it is known that the link
numbers to be removed are respectively “64” and “65”, and the module number is
“11”.

RMV PRALNK: MN=11, SLN=64;

RMV PRALNK: MN=11, SLN=65;

5) Remove the SPM E1.
RMV SPME1: FN=4, BN=6, SN=0, EN=1;

2-47
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

Where, FN stands for the interface frame number; BN for the ET16 slot number; SN
and EN respectively for the start E1 number and end E1 number. All the data directly
references the corresponding parameters in the trunk physical position data.
6) Remove the PRA subscriber.
According to the result, the PRA subscriber number to be deleted is “8550000”.

RMV PRA: D=K'8550000;

Note:
If the sub-route is used only by the PRA trunk, delete the route data.
ISDN data and number segment data are the public data, and do not remove it without confirmation.

2.7.6 Modifying PRA Subscriber Number

I. Example

1) Basic data
Change the PRA subscriber number to 169 from 163.
2) Preset conditions
The PRA implementation mode adopts the trunk mode.

II. Procedures

No. Command name Command function

1 LST/ADD DNSEG List/add number segment*
2 ADD PRA Add PRA subscriber
3 MOD SPMPRATG Modify SPM PRA trunk group
4 RMV PRA Remove PRA subscriber

Note:
“*” indicates that you can refer to other volume of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands.

2-48
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

III. Configuration

1) Query number segments.

LST DNSEG:

Query number segments to check if the number segment "169" exists. Here suppose
there is no such a number segment.
2) Add a PRA subscriber.
z Query the PRA subscriber 163.
LST PRA: D=K'163;

Query the subscriber whose telephone number is 163 to find its relevant data, such as
the charging source code, route selection code, module number, DN set and call
source code.
z Add a PRA subscriber.
Suppose the query result is that the charging source code of the 163 subscriber is
“13”, the route selection code is “4”, the module number is “11”, the DN set is “0” and
the call source code is “0”.

ADD PRA: D=K`169, RTSL=4, ISDNX=1, MN=11, RCHS=13, NS=DDI-1&CLIP-1;

Where, D stands for the telephone number, which will be referenced by the PRA trunk
group; RTSL stands for the route selection code; ISDNX for the ISDN index; MN for
the module number; RCHS for the charging source code; NS for the supplementary
service.
3) Modify the SPM PRA trunk group.
z Query trunk groups.
LST TG;

Query the trunk group data to find the trunk group whose trunk circuit is of the PRA
type.

LST TG: TG=“PRA trunk group title”, SOT=TRUE;

Query the trunk group whose trunk circuit is ”PRA “ to find the PRA trunk group with
the telephone number 163. The parameter SOT is set to ”TRUE”, which indicates
other information will be displayed. Here suppose the trunk group numbers with the
telephone number 163 are “22” and “23”.
z Modify PRA trunk groups.
Respectively modify the trunk groups whose trunk group numbers are “22” and “23”.
Change the telephone number to “169”.

MOD SPMPRATG: TG=22, CDFT=K'169;

MOD SPMPRATG: TG=23, CDFT=K'169;

2-49
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 2 PRA Data Configuration

4) Remove the PRA subscriber number 163.

RMV PRA: D=K'163;

2-50
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

3.1 Basic Concepts

The common components in the Intelligent Network (IN) include Service Switching
Point (SSP), Service Control Point (SCP) and Intelligent Peripheral (IP). The IP
achieves the Specialized Resource Function (SRF); the SCP achieves the Service
Control Function (SCF); the SSP achieves the Service Switching Function (SSF).

The SSP consists of the Call Control Function (CCF) and SSF. The CCF includes
basic call processing function and additional functions for supporting IN calls.

The SSF extends the CCF logic, manage the signaling between the CCF and the SCF,
modify call/connection processing function as required, and process IN service
requests under the control of the SCF.

The SSF and CCF provide, when combined, the group of functions required by the
communication between the CCF and the SCF.

The SRF belongs to the SSP and provides specialized resources for implementing IN
services.

Figure 3-1 shows the IN networking. The SSP communicates with the SCP through
the Signaling System No. 7 (SS7).

SCP

SS No. 7

SSP

Intelligent Network

Figure 3-1 IN networking

3.1.1 Configuration Procedures

The IN data configuration includes the addition, deletion and modification of related IN
data. The logic data of the IN service involves office information, prefix data, SS7 link

3-1
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

data and intelligent service data. There is a restriction and hierarchy relationship
between the IN service data as well as between the link data and IN service data. The
IN service data should be configured in sequence based on the reference relationship
so as to keep the database consistent and safe, enhance the association between
data and reduce the data redundancy. Figure 3-2 shows the reference relationship
between the IN service data and other data.

SCCP data Other IN data

Resource
SCP data
data
Charging data

DSP Call prefix

Local office supplementary
SS7 link DP data data
information

Figure 3-2 Reference relationship between the IN service data

The block in the figure means the content of set data, the line indicates the reference
relationship. The data below the line is cited by the data above the line. According to
the relationship, the data addition, modification should be implemented in ascending
order, the data deletion should be implemented in descending order.

To add the SCP data, first add call prefix, local office information and SS7 link
information. The configuration of the Detection Point (DP) data, SCP data, Service
Call Control Point (SCCP) data, charging data, resource data and other data only
need be carried out on the basis of services.

Certain reference relationship also exists between the call prefix data and DP data. In
fact, the call prefix data references the DP data, but the call prefix data is configured
before the DP data (no strict sequence between them).

Figure 3-2 only describes the common relationship between the IN data. For some
special IN services, the data such as number change is also involved.

3.1.2 Configuration Principles and Cautions

I. DP data

z To trigger an IN service, set [R/N flag] to the “Request” mode and [DP number] to
“DP3”.
z Nested dialing is allowed for IN services by default. However, it is unavailable for
the ordinary card IN service. In this case, set the [constraint relationship] of the IN
service to “YES”.

3-2
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

II. SCP data

z Set all the tables for the SCP data configuration.

z First set the SCP physical address description, then set the SSP physical
address description and SCP configuration. For deletion, it is in the reversed
sequence.

III. SCCP data

z If the signaling point code is adopted, first set the SCCP remote signaling point,
then set the sub-system table. Moreover, the SCCP remote signaling table and
the sub-system table should correspond to the data of the peer Signaling Access
Unit (SAU).
z The Destination Point Codes (DPC) in the sub-system table should be valid in
the SCCP remote signaling point table or that in the local office information table.
In the sub-system table, describe the SCP and SSP sub-systems respectively. The
SCCP Management (SCMG) and Intelligent Network Application Protocol (INAP)
should be configured respectively for the Sub-System Number (SSN) of the SCCP.

Therefore, each SSP or SCP has two sets of the SCCP sub-system data. They are
office signaling point + SCMG sub-system, office signaling point + INAP sub-system,
SAU signaling point + SCMG sub-system, and SAU signaling point + INAP
sub-system. Here the SAU is the SCP signaling access unit.
z If the SSP physical address and SCP physical address are set to the Global Title
(GT) code mode, first set the SCCP remote signaling point and sub-system table
(if necessary), then set the global translation code, finally set the new global
code table according to the translation type.
z The signaling point in the GT translation table should be valid in the SCCP
remote signaling point table or that in the office information table.

IV. Resource data

z Only set the Special Voice Board (SPT) in the voice code table. Do not set other
boards.
z Generally, do not set the start position table of the SPT voice code. If adding
dialects, set the start positions of various voice codes correctly. The “signal zero
level” may be any value and is recommended to be set to "0x55" to avoid any
problem introduced by the upgrade of the host version in the future.

V. Charging data

z The SSP charging data should be consistent with the SCP data. If there is
overdraft or charging rounding, set the charging rounding table.
z The SSP sends the free-of-charge answer signal to the end office by default. If
the SSP is required to send the charging answer signal, set the "Free indication
flag" to "No".

3-3
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

z To set charging data, first set holiday discount data or weekday discount data or
daily discount data, then the charging type data. For deletion, it is in reverse.
z There is no requirement for the setting sequence of the holiday discount data,
weekday discount data and daily discount data. But there is a reference
relationship. The data set later references the previously set discount index
value.

VI. INAP link

z The INAP links to an SAU signaling point should be shared by SMs as evenly as
possible. Therefore, the number difference between Common Channel Signaling
Processing Boards (LPN7) of each module should be no more than 1, and the
number difference of links between two Link Access Protocol Boards (LAP)
should be no more than 1.
z If an SAU is configured with multiple signaling points, and each service is
configured with multiple SCPs (corresponding to respective signaling points of
the SAU) on SSPs, the messages from each SSP to each SCP are allocated
evenly to each SAU signaling point. To ensure the balance allocation of link load,
the number of links of each signaling point should be equal.
z The number of links to each SAU signaling point is recommended to be
configured to 2n, such as 2, 4, 8 and 16. Otherwise, the unbalanced link load may
occur.
z Set the link bandwidth of the communication between modules to 512 kbit/s. For
the module without INAP links, the link bandwidth of the communication between
modules should be first set to 512 kbit/s.
z If a module has no configuration resource and is using the resources of other
module, set the link bandwidth of the communication between modules to 512
kbit/s first.
z The ratio between the number of SPM INAP links and that of the SM INAP links is
2~3. For the principle of SPM link allocation, refer to the principle of the SM link
allocation.

VII. Other data

z When setting the Internet Protocol (IP) addresses of the MEM boards, ensure
that no IP address of the active and standby MEM board is repeated.
z For Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) trunks, configure the supplementary
signaling table according to requirements, and enable the flags that the trunk
requires calling number in the trunk data. Otherwise, an IN call may fail due to the
lack of the calling number.

VIII. System parameters

The system data refers to the public parameter table and module parameter table.
The tables affect global data, so do not modify them if it is not quite necessary.

3-4
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

z In the data configuration, the remained memory should not be less than 200 KB.
On this basis, configure the number of state machines flexibly.
z For an SSP without subscribers, the maximum number of tuples of each table
relevant to subscribers should be reduced to 304.
z The number of filtered activated services should be set to the minimum number
100.
z The minimum number of the Basic Call Status Model (BCSM), Intelligent
Switching Module (INSM) and SRM should be more than or equal to 100.
Configure the number according to actual conditions.
z Generally, the number of BCSMs should be equal to the number of incoming
trunks and less than the number of total trunks multiplied by 0.6.
z The number of INSMs must be equal to the number of BCSMs multiplied by (1+k),
where k stands for the rate of nested dialing calls to total calls. For the office
without nested dialing of IN services, k is 0. For the pure nested dialing, k is 1.
z The number of SRM state machines should be equal to the actual number of
Special Tone (SPT) and Decode Interface (DIN) channels. The number of SRM
state machines should be consistent with the number of SPT channels if the
number of DIN channels is less than that of the SPT channels.
z For integrated SSP offices, the number of intelligent state machines may be
fewer. The number is determined by the traffic allocation of common calls and IN
calls.
z Typical configuration of the public parameter table is as shown in Table 3-1.
Command: LST PUBPRM

Table 3-1 Public parameter table

No. Parameter Value

0 Maximal module number 255
1 Number of ordinary message packets 1600
2 Number of overlong message packets 1000
3 CCB number 1000
4 CR number 2000
5 CPU congestion start 95
6 CPU congestion end 80
7 CPU overload start 90
8 CPU overload end 70
9 Number of queue arrays 10
10 Number of queue array units 60
11 AM optical interface card type 0 0

3-5
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

No. Parameter Value

12 AM optical interface card type 1 0
13 Number of CCB on the SPM 6000

z Typical configuration of the module parameter table is given below.

Command: LST MDU: MN=1, SP=YES;

Where, MN stands for the module number; SP for "Display module parameters".

The setting of the module parameters is related to the hardware version of the
Universal Main Control Board (MPU). Table 3-2 shows the typical configuration of the
module parameters when the CB38MPU board is used. Table 3-3 shows the typical
configuration of the module parameters when the C841SPC board and C842SPC
board is used.

Table 3-2 CB38MPU module parameter table

No. Parameter Value

1 Maximum elements of each dialog 2
2 Maximum number of TCAP state machines 1024
3 Size of the TCAP element buffer area 300
4 INAP dialog IDStart 0
5 INAP dialog IDStop 1024
6 MAP dialog IDStart 0
7 MAP dialog IDStop 1024
8 HLR dialog IDStart 0
9 HLR dialog IDStop 1024
10 VLR dialog IDStart 0
11 VLR dialog IDStop 1024
12 MSC dialog IDStart 0
13 MSC dialog IDStop 1024
14 Number of BCSMs 360
15 Number of INSMs 512
16 Activate the service filtration number 350
17 Call gapping number 32
18 SRM number 128
19 Charging unit 0

3-6
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Table 3-3 SPC module parameter table

No. Parameter Value

1 Maximum elements of each dialog 2
2 Maximum number of TCAP state machines 4096
3 Size of the TCAP element buffer area 4096
4 INAP dialog IDStart 0
5 INAP dialog IDStop 4096
6 MAP dialog IDStart 0
7 MAP dialog IDStop 0
8 HLR dialog IDStart 0
9 HLR dialog IDStop 0
10 VLR dialog IDStart 0
11 VLR dialog IDStop 0
12 MSC dialog IDStart 0
13 MSC dialog IDStop 0
14 Number of BCSMs 2048
15 Number of INSMs 2048
16 Activate the service filtration number 100
17 Call gapping number 32
18 SRM number 1536
19 Charging unit 0

3.2 DP Data Configuration

I. Access code configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD ACCODE Add access code description
MOD ACCODE Modify access code description
RMV ACCODE Remove access code description
LST ACCODE List access code description

3-7
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

2) Main parameters
[access code]

The access code is the first several digits, which are artificially stipulated to allow the
access to the SSP system and are dialed by the caller. Usually they are the same as
the service key of an IN service. To initiate an IN call, the system intercepts the
number that a user dials from the beginning (the length of an access code is
determined by the parameter "length of access code"), then compares the intercepted
number with the access code. If they match, the system triggers the corresponding IN
call. If not, the call fails.

[length of access code]

It defines the length of an access code, indicating the number of digits that the system
is to intercept.

[database start position]

It describes the position of a digit, after which the system will begin to intercept the
digits that the user dials. After the system receives some digits (a fixed number of
such digits is specified by the parameter "length of database field"), it will get a
database number, then uses the database number as an index to query the “SCP
config table”, decides which SCP should be used to process the call. Through the
setting of this parameter, IN calls of different services can be sent to different SCPs. If
this parameter is set to 255, the system will not perform the interception, and in this
case, the IN service will be sent to the local SCP.

[length of database field]

It specifies the number of digits that should be intercepted from the "database start
position".

Note:
z If the parameter "database start position" is set to 0, it means that the interception begins from the
first digit. If it is set to 1, it means that the interception begins from the second digit. The rest may be
deduced by analogy. If it is set to 255, it means no interception.
z For the parameter "database start position", the later software version has different definition. Filling
in 1 for this parameter means that the interception begins from the first digit. Filling in 2 means that
the interception begins from the second digit. The rest may be deduced by analogy.

3) Example

3-8
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Add an access code record. The access code is “300”, the length of the access code
is “6”, the database start position is “3”, and the length of the database field is “3”.
Type the following command.

ADD ACCODE: CODE=K'300, LEN=3, POS=3, DBLEN=3;

In this case, if a user dials 300310, the access code received by the system should be
300 and the database number be 310.

II. TDP configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD TDPCFG Add TDP configuration
MOD TDPCFG Modify TDP configuration
RMV TDPCFG Remove TDP configuration
LST TDPCFG List TDP configuration

2) Main parameters
[DP number]

It defines at which DP the detection and trigger is going on. The range is between 1
and 18 and cannot be 8. The available services adopt the DP3 trigger detection only
(analytical information DP), so it should be set to 3.

[DP standard number]

It describes Trigger Detection Point (TDP) detection and trigger the intelligent call
standards, such as Assigned striking, called number, Prescriptive numeric string,
Prescriptive B channel ID, marked code, Access code and marked active indicator.
Generally, the access code is filled in if there is no special requirement.

[access code]

It is the first digits of the number dialed in a call allowed to access the SSP system and
is set artificially. It directly references the corresponding parameter in the access code
description data.

[service key]

It is an integer indicating the type of one IN service. The SCP confirms the IN service
type according to the parameter reported by the SSP. Generally, it is the same as the
access code.

[R/N flag]

3-9
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

It describes the relationship between the SSP and the SCP. It describes the system
working on the request mode or inform mode after it processes TDP trigger. If working
on the request mode, after triggering TDP and reporting initial DP message to the SCP,
the system will wait for the instructions from the SCP to do the next process. If working
on the inform mode, after triggering TDP and reporting initial DP message to the SCP,
the system will go to the next process without waiting for the instructions from the SCP.
If the system is to trigger an IN call, set this parameter to “REQ (REQUEST)”.

[auxiliary flag]

It describes whether the system works on the SSP mode or auxiliary SSP mode when
it processes the IN service. If it is set to "NO", the system works on the auxiliary SSP
mode, and other SSP can borrow private resources of the system. The operation of
relative resources is processed by the help of the auxiliary SSP. As the request of
triggering an IN call, set this parameter to “NO”.

III. IN service constraint relationship

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SRVRST Add intelligent service constraint relationship
MOD SRVRST Modify intelligent service constraint relationship
RMV SRVRST Remove intelligent service constraint relationship
LST SRVRST List intelligent service constraint relationship

2) Main parameters
[outer layer in service key]

It stands for the service key triggered first and it references the corresponding
parameter in the TDP configuration data directly.

[inner layer in service key]

It stands for the later triggered intelligent service, that is, to trigger another intelligent
service in processing the former intelligent service. It references the corresponding
parameter in the TDP configuration data directly.

[constraint relationship]

It controls whether there is constraint relationship between the above two services. If
it is set to “Yes”, it means that there is the constraint relationship. In this case, the
outer layer intelligent service cannot trigger the inner layer intelligent service. If it is set
to “No”, it means that there is no constraint relationship. In this case, the outer layer

3-10
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

intelligent service can trigger the inner layer intelligent service, that is, the nesting
dialing is available.

Note:
By default, the nested dialing is not restricted.

3.3 SCP Data Configuration

I. SCP configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SCPCFG Add SCP configuration
MOD SCPCFG Modify SCP configuration
RMV SCPCFG Remove SCP configuration
LST SCPCFG List SCP configuration

2) Main parameters
[service key]

It is an integer indicating the type of one IN service. The SCP confirms the IN service
type according to the parameter reported by the SSP. It references the corresponding
parameter in the TDP configuration data directly.

[database number]

It corresponds to the service key. If the [database start position] in the corresponding
“TDP access code table” is 255, it means that the default database is used and the
database number is configured as 65535. The system intercepts data from the
number dialed by a user according to the “access code description”, then compares it
with the database number to confirm the SCP number.

[SCP i (0ñi ñ15)]

The SCP number means which SCP controls the relevant intelligent service. Each
SCP number will be referenced by the corresponding parameter in the SCP physical
address table and the SSP physical address table.

3-11
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

II. SCP physical address configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SCPADR Add SCP physical address description
MOD SCPADR Modify SCP physical address description
RMV SCPADR Remove SCP physical address description
LST SCPADR List SCP physical address description

2) Main parameters
[SCP number]

It references the corresponding parameter in the SCP configuration data directly.

[DPC flag]

It indicates whether the SCP physical address is in the GT mode or DPC mode. If the
address format of the SCP is the DPC format, set this parameter to "YES". If the
address format of the SCP is the GT code format, set this parameter to "NO".

[SSN flag]

It indicates whether there is SSN in the SCP physical address. The SSN identifies the
SCCP users at a node. If the address format of the SCP is the DPC format, set this
parameter to "YES". If the address format of SCP is the GT code format, set this
parameter to "NO".

[GT type]

It indicates the type of the GT. If the address format of the SCP is the DPC format, set
this parameter to "NO". If the address format of the SCP is the GT code format,
configure corresponding GT type. Set this parameter to GT4 usually.

[route flag]

It indicates whether the type of the SCP physical address is the DPC format or GT
format. If the SCP physical address is in the DPC format, set this parameter to
"ADDRESSING BY DPC". If the SCP physical address is in the GT code format, set
this parameter to "ADDRESSING BY GT".

[DPC address]

It indicates the destination signaling address (SAU), which is a 24-digit 16-hex code.
The most significant eight bits are the code of the main signaling area.

[network ID]

3-12
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

It indicates the identification of the network where the SCP physical address locates,
which is usually configured as NAT (NATIONAL).

[SSN]

It indicates the subsystem number and identifies the SCCP users at a node. Set it to
"INAP (INAP)" for the IN service.

[content of GT]

Fill it with the content of a GT (hex), not including the GT type. For example, if the GT
content is 00 12 03 12 34 56 78, 00 is the translating type, 1 is the ISDN number, 2
indicates that the number of address digits is even, 03 indicates nationally valid
number and 12 34 56 78 is the address information.

Note:
For GT4 code, refer to “GT code translation” in 3.4 SCCP Data Configuration in this chapter.
If the GT code format is selected, the global translation code should be configured.

III. SSP physical address configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SSPADR Add SSP physical address description
MOD SSPADR Modify SSP physical address description
RMV SSPADR Remove SSP physical address description
LST SSPADR List SSP physical address description

2) Main parameters
Refer to II. SCP physical address configuration.

3.4 SCCP Data Configuration

I. SCCP DPC configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SCCPDPC Add SCCP DPC

3-13
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Command name Command function

MOD SCCPDPC Modify SCCP DPC
RMV SCCPDPC Remove SCCP DPC
LST SCCPDPC List SCCP DPC

2) Main parameters
[remote signaling point index]

It is unique in the remote signaling table, ranging from 0~254.

[international network code], [international reserved network code]

The 14-digit signaling point code is adopted, ranging from 0000~3FFF.

[national reserved network code], [national network code]

The 24-digit signaling point code is adopted, ranging from 000000~FFFFFF. It

references the corresponding parameter in the DPC table directly.

[load share signaling point index]

Set it to 65535 for there is no load-sharing signaling point temporarily.

Note:
The number of the signaling codes in the four networks is not fixed. The signaling point code may be a
14-digit or 24-digit one, which is decided according to the specific data configuration.

II. SCCP subsystem configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SCCPSSN Add SCCP subsystem
MOD SCCPSSN Modify SCCP subsystem
RMV SCCPSSN Remove SCCP subsystem
LST SCCPSSN List SCCP subsystem

2) Main parameters
[subsystem index]

3-14
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

It is unique in the SCCP sub-system table, ranging from 0~799.

[SSN code]

It stands for the code of the subsystem number in the SCCP message that is to be
sent to the remote signaling point. For the IN service, set this parameter to "INAP" or
"SCCP management".

The option “SCCP management” is used to manage various states of the SCCP itself.
The intelligent application part transfers the INAP information to the upper layer.

[DPC]

It directly references the corresponding parameter in the Message Transfer Part (MTP)
destination signaling point data or the data in the office information table.

[correlation local subsystem i (1ñ i ñ5)]

It indicates one of the relevant local SCCP subscribers. Its value for the IN service is
the same as the SSN code.

[standby subsystem index]

It is the index of the standby subsystem when the subsystem identified by an SSN
code is faulty. Set it to 65535.

Note:
z For a signaling point code of the IN service, configure two records of SCCP subsystem data and set
the SSN codes as specified above.
z In complete SCCP data of the IN service, the SCP and SSP should be described in the SCCP
sub-system table.

3) Example
Add SCCP sub-system data. The "DPC" is 332201, the "Network number of
subsystem" is “national”, the "Correlation local subsystem1" is “INAP”, the "Standby
subsystem index" is 65535, the subsystem index numbers are respectively 0 and 1.
For a signaling point, the SSN code should be “INAP” and “SCCP management”. The
commands are as follows:

ADD SCCPSSN: SSNINDEX=0, SSNNETNUM=CN, SSNCODE=INAP,

DPCCODE="332201", RELSSN1=INAP, BAKINDEX=65535;

ADD SCCPSSN: SSNINDEX=1, SSNNETNUM=CN, SSNCODE=SCMG,

DPCCODE="332201", RELSSN1=SCMG, BAKINDEX=65535;

3-15
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

III. GT code configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SCCPGT Add SCCP GT code translation
MOD SCCPGT Modify SCCP GT code translation
RMV SCCPGT Remove SCCP GT code translation
LST SCCPGT List SCCP GT code translation

2) Main parameters
[GT code index]

It is the record index (serial) number in the global translation code table. It is unique in
the table, and ranges from 0 to 99.

[network indication]

It indicates whether the network that the local SCCP belongs to is International
network, International reserved network, National network or National reserved
network. Generally select "National network".

[content of GT]

It indicates GT code. The coding in the intelligent network is performed according to

the GT type-4 generally.

[translation result type]

It indicates that the local SCCP translates the CONTENT OF GT into the new type of
different combinations of the DPC, SSN and GT. Its value range is DPC+OLD_GT
(STP POINT), DPC+SSN (DESTINATION POINT), DPC+NEWGT INDEX or DPC.

[SSN code]

It indicates the code (value) of the subsystem number of the SCCP information that is
to be sent to the remote signaling point. For the IN service, it should be configured as
INAP. It is valid when the ‘DPC+SSN’ is typed into the field [translation result type].

[sub-system]

If the translation result is DPC+SSN, this parameter is mandatory. Refer to 3.3 II.
SCP physical address configuration.

[DPC]

Refer to 3.3 II. SCP physical address configuration.

[new GT index]

3-16
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Only when the translation type is DPC+NEWGT, is this parameter effective. This
parameter indicates the position of the new global translation code in the table. It will
be referenced by the new global translation code data.

Note:
GT4 code structure:
Deviation 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 GT indicator
1 Translation type
2 Numbering plan code design
3 01 address nature indicator
4~N Address information

z The first byte - GT indicator: It indicates the structure of a GT code and is 4 here. The GT code
consists of “translation type”, “numbering plan”, “code design”, “address nature indicator” and
“address information”.
z The second byte - translation type: It indicates a combination when a GT code is translated into new
DPC, SSN and GT. If the translation type is not applied, fill in 0.
z The third byte – numbering plan and code design: The most significant four bits are the numbering
plan, indicating the mode in which the address information is numbered. Generally it is 0001 (ISDN/
telephone numbering plan). The least significant four bits are the code design, indicating the parity of
the number of involved address signals. 0001 means that the number of Binary Coded Decimal
(BCD) digits is odd and 0010 means that the number of BCD digits is even.
z The fourth byte - address nature indicator: Bit-7 is the O/E flag, indicating the parity of the number of
the address signals in the address information. 0 means that the number of the address signals is
even and 1 means that the number of the address signals is odd. Bit-0 to Bit-6 are the address nature
indicators, which indicate the specific address attribute. The codes are as follows: 0000000 (0) idle,
0000001 (1) subscriber number, 0000010 (2) national standby, 0000011 (3) national valid number,
0000100 (4) international number, 0000101 (5) to 1111111 (127) idle.
z The fifth byte and following - address information: The big-endian byte ordering is applied. Two BCD
codes are in one byte. For example, if the ISDN/telephone numbering plan is applied, the national
network is valid and the address is 1234567, then the GT code is 0400120321436507.

IV. New GT code translation configuration

If the translation type of a new GT code is DPC+NEWGT, configure the new GT code
translation description.
1) Relevant commands

3-17
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Command name Command function

ADD SCCPNGT Add SCCP new GT code translation
MOD SCCPNGT Modify SCCP new GT code translation
RMV SCCPNGT Remove SCCP new GT code translation
LST SCCPNGT List SCCP new GT code translation

2) Main parameters
[new GT code index]

It is unique in the table and directly references the corresponding data in the global
translation code table.

[new GT code]

It indicates a new GT code.

3.5 Resource Data Configuration

I. SSP SRF configuration

This operation is to configure specialized resources of certain IN service for relevant

modules.
1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SSPSRC Add SSP specialized resource function
MOD SSPSRC Modify SSP specialized resource function
RMV SSPSRC Remove SSP specialized resource function
LST SSPSRC List SSP specialized resource function

2) Main parameters
[service key]

It is an integer that indicates the service that an intelligent call is of. The SCP confirms
the type of the IN service according to the parameter reported by the SSP. This
parameter references the corresponding parameter in the TDP configuration.

[module]

It indicates the module that has the tone sending and number receiving functions of
certain IN service corresponding to the service key. If the module number is 255, it
means that all modules possess the two functions.

3-18
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

II. SPT voice code configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SPTTON Add SPT voice code
MOD SPTTON Modify SPT voice code
RMV SPTTON Remove SPT voice code
LST SPTTON List SPT voice code

2) Main parameters
[record code]

It indicates the record code of the played voice announcement. If the voice sending is
required in the intelligent calling, the system will search the SPT tone-sending code of
the voice announcement in the SPT board according to the record code stipulated in
the service procedures.

Note:
z This table is configured only for the C841SPT board. The data in the table is provided by the voice
recording person.
z In the C841SPT board application, the data configuration is not required because the voice code
data has been automatically set in the process of dynamic voice loading.

III. Start voice code configuratio of the SPT board

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SPTBRD Add start voice code of the SPT board
MOD SPTBRD Modify start voice code of the SPT board
RMV SPTBRD Remove start voice code of the SPT board
LST SPTBRD List start voice code of the SPT board

2) Main parameters
[start voice code of Chinese standard tone]

It indicates the start position of the Chinese voice in the memory of the SPT board.

3-19
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

[start voice code of English standard tone]

It indicates the start position of the English voice in the memory of the SPT board.

[start voice code of dialect tone]

It indicates the start position of a dialect in the memory of the SPT board.

[start voice code of DTMF signal tone]

It indicates the start position of the DTMF voice in the memory of the SPT board.

[zero level value of signal tone]

It indicates the code value of the SPT board in playing mute voice.

Note:
z This operation is only valid for the SM.
z The start voice system of the standard Chinese and English voice has been set automatically. Only if
the dialect configuration is required and the host version is earlier than the version 5006, will the
table be set.
z The above start voice codes are determined in recording. In data configuration, all start voice codes
should be accurate.
z The zero level value of the signal tone is recommended to be 0x55 (hex). If other value is adopted,
the compatibility cannot be ensured absolutely in the system upgrading.

IV. Configuration of resource searching sequence

The set of commands are applied in the case that a module has no specialized
resources or its specialized resources are faulty and it is necessary to use the
specialized resources of other modules. The ADD SRCSRH command configures the
searching sequence among the modules that provide the specialized resources.
1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD SRCSRH Add resource searching sequence
MOD SRCSRH Modify resource searching sequence
RMV SRCSRH Remove resource searching sequence
LST SRCSRH List resource searching sequence

2) Main parameters

3-20
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

[module]

It indicates the number of the module which needs resources. It must correspond to
the configuration of the AM module description table.

[resource type]

It indicates the resource type supported by other modules. The resources of voice and
number receiver should be applied in a module. Therefore, when the resource
searching sequence is added, the data of the three types of resources (SRM idle
control block, SPT voice board and Dual Tone Number Receiving & Drive Board
(DRV)) should be added.

[configuration status]

It indicates the status of the specialized resource of the module. It is not applied
temporarily.

[search mode]

There are two kinds of search modes, that is, fixed search and cycle search. If the
search mode is set to the fixed search, every search begins with the 1st search
module, then others in turn. If the search mode is set to the cycle search, the first
search begins with the 1st search module at first, the search of next time begins with
the 2nd search module at first, and so on;

[the ist search module (1ñ i ñ16)]

It indicates the number of the module with specialized resources which can be shared
by other modules.

Note:
This command is only suitable for the SM, not suitable for the SPM. The resources of the SM and SPM
cannot be shared for each other at present.

3.6 Charging Data Configuration

I. Charging category configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD CHGCLS Add a charging category

3-21
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Command name Command function

MOD CHGCLS Modify a charging category
RMV CHGCLS Remove a charging category
LST CHGCLS List charging categories

2) Main parameters
[charge category]

It ranges from 1 to 1000. It is an integer related to the artificially stipulated specific

charging tariff, charging mode and discount. The SSP determines the call charging
tariff and discount of a call according to the charging category sent by the SCP.

It will be referenced by other charging data, so it must correspond to SCP data setting.

[tariff]

It specifies the price of each pulse during the start time of a charging category. It
ranges from 0 to 65535, expressed in cent.

[PB tariff]

It specifies the price of each pulse during the continued time of a charging category. It
ranges from 0 to 65535, expressed in cent.

[first interval]

It specifies the time interval for the first pulse when the charging category starts
charging.

[start pulse]

It specifies the number of meter counts within the first interval.

[continued interval]

It specifies the time interval for the second and each of the following call charge
calculations after the first call charge calculation.

[continued pulse]

It specifies the number of meter counts within the metering interval.

[discount index]

Set it to 65535 for no discount. It specifies the discount index of this charging category.
The switch will use this index as the key work to find the discounts in the daily,
weekday and holiday discount table.

[min charging time]

3-22
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

It specifies the minimum chargeable duration, expressed in second.

Note:
In the current IN service charging, the charging time is expressed in 100 ms. The interval is 60, that is,
6000 ms (6 seconds), which is a metering unit.

II. Charging rounding configuration

This operation is to define the card credit and the charging unit of the conversion cost
reported by the SSP to the SCP.
1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD CHGRND Add charging rounding
MOD CHGRND Modify charging rounding
RMV CHGRND Remove charging rounding
LST CHGRND List charging rounding

2) Main parameters
[service key]

It directly references the corresponding parameter in the TDP configuration data.

[charge category]

It directly references the corresponding parameter in the charge category data.

[allowed PB times]

It specifies the number of meter counts allowed for the overdraft in the case that a
service user has no enough money for the conversation. Refer to I. Charging category
configuration.

[max. rounding fee]

Its range is 0~100. When the SSP reports the total conversation charge, it processes
the charge on the basis of rounding. The value less than 0.5 max rounding fee will be
abandoned. It is unnecessary to fill in this parameter. The charging duration is
expressed in cent.

3-23
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Note:
If certain service is not to be set (by default), the charging duration is expressed in cent and the credit is
zero, that is, the PB pulse times allowed for overdraft is zero.

III. Charging property configuration

This operation describes whether the trunks between the SSP and an end office will
be charged.
1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD CHGPRO Add charging property
MOD CHGPRO Modify charging property
RMV CHGPRO Remove charging property
LST CHGPRO List charging property

2) Main parameters
[DN set]

Its range is 0~4. It is a unified code and identifies a group of subscribers. The grouping
of subscribers is based on the understanding of the called number (or called prefix). It
starts from 0, and only one DN set is set for one office.

[called prefix]

It indicates the service key of relevant IN service.

[free or not]

It is a logical variable. Set it to “TRUE” or “FALSE” according to the fact whether the
service is free of charge or not. If it is free, set it to “TRUE”. In this case, the SSP
sends the charge signal or free signal in relevant signaling.

Note:
If the charging property is not set for certain service, the system will charge the service by default.

3-24
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

IV. Holiday tariff discount configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD HLDDIS Add holiday tariff discount
MOD HLDDIS Modify holiday tariff discount
RMV HLDDIS Remove holiday tariff discount
LST HLDDIS List holiday tariff discount

2) Main parameters
[discount index]

It corresponds to the discount index of certain charging category in the charging

category table. It directly references the discount index value in the charging category
table.

[tariff discount style]

The discount styles include three types, that is, Discount by percent, Discount by time
and Discount by specified tariff. If it is “Discount by time”, TA is the product of the TA
and discount value, and TB is the product of the TB and discount value. If it is
“Discount by specified tariff”, the charge or tariff after discount is the actual payment.
Generally, select “Discount by percent”.

V. Weekday tariff discount configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD WEKDIS Add weekday tariff discount
MOD WEKDIS Modify weekday tariff discount
RMV WEKDIS Remove weekday tariff discount
LST WEKDIS List weekday tariff discount

2) Main parameters
[discount index]

It corresponds to the discount index of certain charging category in the charging

category table. It directly references the discount index value in the charging category
table.

3-25
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

VI. Daily tariff discount configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD NRMDIS Add daily tariff discount
MOD NRMDIS Modify daily tariff discount
RMV NRMDIS Remove daily tariff discount
LST NRMDIS List daily tariff discount

2) Main parameters
[discount index]

It corresponds to the discount index of certain charging category in the charging

category table. It directly references the discount index value in the charging category
table.

Note:
There are at most 100 discount time segments within one day.

VII. Conversation duration discount configuration

This operation realizes the charge discount if the conversation duration exceeds the
set value. This discount is further discounted on the basis of current discount.
1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD TIMEDIS Add conversation duration discount
MOD TIMEDIS Modify conversation duration discount
RMV TIMEDIS Delete conversation duration discount
LST TIMEDIS List conversation duration discount

2) Main parameters
[discount index]

It corresponds to the discount index of certain charging category in the charging

category table. It directly references the discount index value in the charging category
table.

3-26
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

[conversation duration]

It sets a conversation duration value. If the conversation duration exceeds the set
value, there is further discount on the basis of current discount. The duration is
expressed in minute.

3.7 Other Data Configuration

I. Configuration of the telephone number continuum project

When a telephone number is to be announced, the system will add mute tones in the
proper positions among the numbers according to the telephone number continuum
project, so that the subscriber can hear the telephone number clearly.
1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD RDMODE Add the telephone number continuum project
RMV RDMODE Remove the telephone number continuum project
LST RDMODE List the telephone number continuum project

2) Main parameters
[code digit number]

It specifies the length of the telephone number to be announced. When the telephone
number is to be announced, the system first checks the telephone number continuum
project table. If there is a record that matches the length of the telephone number, the
system will add mute tones during the announcement in set positions in the order of
Group One, Group Two, and so on. If no record matches the length, no mute tones will
be added during the announcement.

[the ist group (1 ñ i ñ 7)]

It is relative to the No.(i-1) mute tone, and is the position of the No.i mute tone. The
first group indicates the position where the first mute tone is inserted to the number.

II. MEM information configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD MEMCFG Add MEM information
MOD MEMCFG Modify MEM information
RMV MEMCFG Remove MEM information

3-27
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Command name Command function

LST MEMCFG List MEM information

2) Main parameters
[MEM card group number]

It is the number of an MEM board in one switching module. The value is the same for
various modules of the Source Service Access Point (SSAP) connected to one
Service Management Control Point (SMCP).

[IP address of MEM card 0], [IP address of MEM card 1]

MEM board 0 is in the upper half part of the main control frame, and MEM board 1 in
the lower half part.

[system number]

It indicates the transmission protocol type of the MEM board.

Note:
The data should be configured for each SM. The actual board is not required, but the data should be
configured, otherwise the transmission between modules will get faulty.

III. Configuration of caller information of IN local call

When the local call is to send the calling number, the calling number can be
determined according to the combination of the service key and called prefix in the
table.
1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD CLILOC Add caller information of IN local call
MOD CLILOC Modify caller information of IN local call
RMV CLILOC Remove caller information of IN local call
LST CLILOC List caller information of IN local call

2) Main parameters
[service key]

3-28
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

It references the corresponding parameter in the TDP configuration data directly.

[called prefix]

It references the corresponding parameter in the call prefix data directly.

[select transmitting caller number]

There are three options, original caller number, charging number (which is the number
of the service account, and is transmitted according to the length of the local number.
For example, the number to be sent is 3000000 in the “300” service.) and assigned
number.

[assigned number]

If the calling number is the assigned number, the specified telephone number should
be entered here.

IV. MEM configuration

1) Relevant commands
Command name Command function
ADD MI Add MEM configuration.
RMV MI Remove MEM configuration
LST MI List MEM configuration

2) Main parameters
[module]

It directly references the corresponding parameter in the TDP configuration.

[The 1st search module]

It is the module that the switch will first search.

[MEM IP 1]

It is the first IP address of the MEM board.

[MEM IP 2]

It is the second IP address of the MEM board.

[FEP IP 1]

It is the first IP address of the Front End Processor (FEP).

[FEP IP 2]

It is the second IP address of the FEP.

3-29
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

[FEP port number]

It is the FEP port number.

3.8 Examples

3.8.1 Configuring IN Data

I. Example

1) Basic data
z IN service
Configure one IN service that includes three SMs and one SPM. Table 3-4 specifies
the IN service to be configured. Table 3-5 gives the basic charging data of the IN
service. Table 3-6 lists the IP addresses. The SMs are pure subscriber modules and
their trunks are on the SPM.

Table 3-4 IN service configuration table

Name Access code Service key Database

“300” service 300 300 810

Table 3-5 Charging table

Tariff of every minute

Tariff of the first
Charging category after the first three Discount index
three minutes
minutes
2 145 50 none

Table 3-6 IP address table

IP IP SCP IP SCP IP
Group Port Sub-net gatewa
addres addres addres addres
number No. mask y
s1 s2 s0 s1
10.11.2 10.11.2 10.11.3 255.255 10.11.0.
MEM 0 5600
5.34 5.36 1.1 .255.0 0

z Signaling point data

The 24/14-digit signaling point code is adopted, the office signaling point code is
"aaabbb", the destination signaling point code (810 database) is “111222”. Two links
are allocated between two signaling points.

3-30
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

The signaling link codes are respectively 0 and 1. The link circuit number is the time
slot 16 of relevant PCM.
z Hardware configuration of SPM INAP links
ET16 boards are respectively configured in Slot 5 and Slot 6 of Interface frame 4.
CPC boards are respectively configured in Slot 22 and Slot 23 of SPM frame 20.
z SM configuration
One of three SMs is configured with the voice resource frame and MEM board. The
other two modules share the relevant resources of this module.
2) Preset conditions
z Modules 85, 87, 89 are able to work normally and are configured with voice
resources.
z The SPM 1 works normally.
z The SRM resource frame has been configured, and relevant boards work
normally. The Special Tone Board (SPD) has been configured with relevant
voice resources of IN services.
z The above relevant CPC boards and ET16 boards have been configured with
relevant protocol and type.
z The number receiving resource frame of SM 85 is configured. The relevant
boards work normally. The SPD board is configured with relevant IN service
voice resources.
z The MEM board of SM 85 is configured and works normally.
z The number segment data and call source data whose DN set is 0, call source is
0 are configured correctly.

II. Precedures

No. Command name Command function

1 ADD CNACLD Add call prefix*
2 ADD AUSSIG Add supplementary signaling*
3 SET OFI Set local office information*
4 ADD N7DSP Add MTP destination signaling point*
5 ADD N7LKS Add MTP link set*
6 ADD N7RT Add MTP route*
7 ADD SPMN7LNK Add SPM MTP link*
8 ADD ACCODE Add access code
9 ADD TDPCFG Add TDP configuration
10 ADD SCPADR Add SCP physical address
11 ADD SSPADR Add SSP physical address

3-31
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

No. Command name Command function

12 ADD SCPCFG Add SCP configuration
13 ADD SCCPDPC Add SCCP DPC
14 ADD SCCPSSN Add SCCP subsystem
15 ADD SSPSRC Add SSP SRF
16 ADD SRCSRH Add resource searching sequence
17 ADD CHGCLS Add charging category
18 ADD MI Add MEM configuration
19 ADD MEMCFG Add MEM information

Note:
“*” indicates that you can refer to other volume of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands. No more description will be given in the following
section.

III. Configuration

1) Add the call prefix.

According to Table 3-4, the call prefix of the IN service is “300”. The service category
and service attribute are “Intelligent service”. Because the SSP has independent
charging system, as for the charging selection code, fill in “65535”, which indicates no
charging.

The “300” service will intercept the later database number, so set the number length to
6.

ADD CNACLD: P=0, PFX=K'300, CSTP=IN, CSA=INSVR, MINL=6, MAXL=6,

CHSC=65535;

Where, P stands for DN set, which directly references the corresponding data in the
preset conditions in the example; PFX stands for the call prefix; CSTP for the service
category; CSA for the service attribute and CHSC for the charging selection code.
2) Add supplementary signaling.
Add supplementary signaling. Select “Yes” for the parameter "Request caller number",
set the parameter "Request caller position" to “3”, and select “Yes” for the parameter
"Send caller number" so as to send the caller number when the local exchange
reports the number.

3-32
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

ADD AUSSIG: PFX=K'300, P=0, CSC=0, SA6=TRUE, SA6P=3, SRD=TRUE;

Where, PFX stands for the call prefix, which directly references the corresponding
parameter in the call prefix data;

P stands for the DN set;

CSC for the call source, which directly references the corresponding parameter in the
preset condition in the example;

SA6 stand for Request caller number;

SA6P for Request caller position;

SRD for Send caller number.

3) Set local office information.
Set the "Local type" parameter to “toll, urban & rural call”, the "National network valid"
parameter to "yes", the "Provide SCCP" parameter to "non-connection oriented", the
parameters "Network 1", "Network 2", "Network 3" and "Network 4" to "national", the
"Local area code" parameter to 755 and the "Nation/region" to "C43". From the basic
data in the example, the office signaling point is “aaabbb”.

SET OFI: LOT=CMPX, NN=TRUE, SN1=NAT, SN2=NAT, SN3=NAT, SN4=NAT,

NPC="aaabbb", SCCP=NOLINK, SPF=TRUE, LAC=K'755, LNC=C43;

Where, LOT stands for Local type, which usually is "toll, urban & rural call";

NN indicates that the national network is valid;

SNi (1≤ i≤4) stands for No.i search network, which is "national";

SCCP stands for SCCP provision; LAC stands for the local area code; LNC for Nation
code;

NPC stands for national network code, which will be referenced by the SSP physical
address description data and SCCP subsystem data.
4) Add MTP destination signaling point.
z Query destination signaling points.
Query destination signaling points to find an unused destination signaling point. Here
suppose the destination signaling point index “1” is unused.
z Add a destination signaling point.
ADD N7DSP: DPX=1, NPC="111222";

Where, DPX stands for the DSP index, which will be referenced by the MTP route
data;

NPC stands for the national network code, which directly references the
corresponding parameter in the basic data in the example and will be referenced by

3-33
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

the SSP physical address description data, SCCP subsystem data and SCCP remote
signaling point data.
5) Add an MTP link set.
z Query MTP link sets.
LST N7LKS:

Query MTP link sets to find an unused link set. Here suppose the link set "2" is
unused.
z Add an MTP link set.
ADD N7LKS: LS=2, LSN="SCP link set 1", APX=2, LKS=2;

Where, LS stands for the link set, which will be referenced by the MTP route data;

LSN stands for the link set title;

APX stands for the adjacent DSP index, which references the corresponding
parameter in the MTP DPC data directly;

LKS stands for the link selection code, which specifies how to select MTP links.
6) Add an MTP route.
ADD N7RT: RN="RT1", LS=2, DPX=1;

Where, RN stands for the route title;

LS for the link set, which references the corresponding parameter in the MTP link set.

DPX stands for the DSP index, which references the corresponding parameter in the
MTP DPC table.
7) Add MTP links.
For the sake of security, here allocate two links to different CPC boards and ET16
boards.

ADD SPMN7LNK: FN=20, BN=22, BSN=0, LIMFN=4, EBN=5, EN=0, C=16, LS=2,
SLC=0;

ADD SPMN7LNK: FN=20, BN=23, BSN=0, LIMFN=4, EBN=6, EN=0, C=16, LS=2,
SLC=1;

Where, FN stands for the SPM frame number; BN for the CPC slot number; LIMFN for
the interface frame number; EBN for the ET16 slot number; C for the circuit number of
E1/T1 (These parameters directly reference the basic data in the example);

BSN stands for the in-card link number;

EN for the in-card E1/T1 number, which is the No. 0 links of the CPC boards in Slot 22
and Slot 23 of the No. 20 SPM frame (The bearer circuits of the links respectively are
the No. 16 circuits of the first E1 of slots 5, 6 of the No. 4 interface frame);

3-34
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

LS stands for the link set, which directly references the corresponding parameter in
the MTP link set data;

SLC stands for the signaling link code, which is the logical code of the signaling link
and cannot be repeated in the link set.
8) Add an access code.
From Table 3-4, the relevant data of the access code can be obtained. The "300"
service intercepts the number from the third digit of the telephone number and
intercepts three digits in total.

ADD ACCODE: CODE=K'300, LEN=3, POS=3, DBLEN=3;

Where, CODE stands for the access code; POS for the database start position;
DBLEN for the length of database field. There is an association between the database
number in the SPC configuration data and these two data.

The “300” service intercepts the number from the fourth digit. The number digit is
numbered from 0, so as for the start position of the database, fill in “3”.
9) Add TDP configuration.
At present, the DP number is “3”, the DP standard number is usually the access code,
and the service key is the same as the access code. In order to trigger the IN service,
set the R/N flag to "REQ".

ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, DPCNO=ACODE, CODE=K'300, SKEY=300;

Where, DPNO stands for the DP number; DPCNO stands for the DP standard
number;

CODE stands for the access code, which references the corresponding parameter in
the access code data directly;

SKEY stands for the service key, which will be referenced by the ADD SCPADR
command;

Choose the default values for the R/N flag and auxiliary flag.
10) Add SCP physical address description.
From the basic data in the example, the SCP physical address adopts the signaling
code format. The route adopts the DPC address searching mode. If the network ID
refers to the national network, it is valid. For the sub-system number, select “INAP”.

From the access code description data in Table 3-4, the "300" service applies SCP1.

ADD SCPADR: SCP=1, DPCF=YES, SSNF=YES, RT=DPC, DPC="111222",

NID=NAT, SSN=INAP;

Where, SCP stands for the SCP number, which will be referenced by the SSP
physical address description and SCP configuration;

3-35
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

DPCF stands for the DPC flag; SSNF for the SSN flag; RT for the route flag;

NID stands for the network ID; SSN for the sub-system number;

DPC stands for the DPC address, which directly references the corresponding data in
the destination signaling point for standard intelligent network.

When the SCP is 1, the DPC address is not equal to the DPC address of the SSP,
which indicates that the SSP communicates with the SCP through INAP links. These
parts form the standard intelligent network.
11) Add SSP physical address description.
From the basic data in the example, the SSP physical address adopts the signaling
point code format. The route adopts the DPC address searching mode. If the network
ID is “national network”, it is valid. For the sub-system number, select “INAP”.

ADD SSPADR: SCP=1, DPCF=YES, SSNF=YES, RT=DPC, DPC="aaabbb",

NID=NAT, SSN=INAP;

Where, SCP stands for the SCP number, which references the corresponding
parameter in the SCP physical address description;

DPC stands for the DPC address, which references the corresponding parameter in
the local information data directly.

For the meanings of other parameters, refer to the above step.

12) Add SCP configuration.
From the description data of the access code, the database number is known as 810,
and SCP1 is used in the “300” service.

ADD SCPCFG: SKEY=300, DB=810, SCP1=YES;

Where, SKEY stands for the service key, which references the corresponding
parameter in the TDP configuration directly;

DB stands for the database number;

SCPi stands for the SCP number, which references the corresponding parameter in
the SCP physical address description directly.
13) Add an SCCP remote DPC.
ADD SCCPDPC: SPCINDEX=0, SPC2="111222", SHAREDPCI=65535;

Where, SPCINDEX stands for the remote signaling point index (suppose “0” is
unused);

SPC2 stands for the national network code, which references the corresponding
parameter in the MTP DPC data directly;

3-36
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

SHAREDPCI stands for the load share signaling point index (for intelligent service,
the value “65535” means there is no load sharing).
14) Add SCCP subsystems.
ADD SCCPSSN: SSNINDEX=0, SSNNETNUM=CN, SSNCODE=INAP,
DPCCODE="aaabbb", BAKINDEX=65535;

ADD SCCPSSN: SSNINDEX=1, SSNNETNUM=CN, SSNCODE=SCMG,

DPCCODE="aaabbb", BAKINDEX=65535;

ADD SCCPSSN: SSNINDEX=2, SSNNETNUM=CN, SSNCODE=INAP,

DPCCODE="111222", BAKINDEX=65535;

ADD SCCPSSN: SSNINDEX=3, SSNNETNUM=CN, SSNCODE=SCMG,

DPCCODE="111222", BAKINDEX=65535;

Where, SSNINDEX stands for the subsystem index (here suppose 0 to 3 are unused);

SSNNETNUM stands for the network number of subsystem (here CN stands for
"National");

SSNCODE stands for the SSN code, which is set to “INAP” and “SCCP
management”;

DPCCODE stands for the DPC, which references the corresponding parameter in the
MTP DPC data and local information data directly;

BAKINDEX stands for the standby subsystem index (if the IN service has no standby
subsystem, set it to “65535”).
15) Add SSP specialized resource function.
ADD SSPSRC: SKEY=300, MN=255;

Where, SKEY stands for the service key and MN stands for the module number.
16) Add resource searching sequence.
According to the basic data in the example, only the SM 85 has voice resources. The
SM 87 and SM 89 need to use the voice resources of the SM 85, including the number
receiving resource, the playing resource and the SRM control block.

ADD SRCSRH: MDU=87, SRC=DIN, SRH=FIX, MDU1=85;

ADD SRCSRH: MDU=87, SRC=BRD, SRH=FIX, MDU1=85;

ADD SRCSRH: MDU=87, SRC=IDLE, SRH=FIX, MDU1=85;

ADD SRCSRH: MDU=89, SRC=DIN, SRH=FIX, MDU1=85;

ADD SRCSRH: MDU=89, SRC=BRD, SRH=FIX, MDU1=85;

ADD SRCSRH: MDU=89, SRC=IDLE, SRH=FIX, MDU1=85;

3-37
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Where, MDU stands for the module number; SRC stands for the resource type; SRH
stands for the search mode; MDU1 stands for the module to be searched.
17) Add a charging category.
The basic cycle of the IN charging is 100 milliseconds, that is, 100 milliseconds can be
a metering unit. Suppose the first metering interval is 180 seconds, which
corresponds to a first metering pulse (first metering unit), and the later metering
interval is 60 seconds, which corresponds to a metering pulse (metering unit).

ADD CHGCLS: CLS=2, RAT=145, PRAT=50, TA=180, PA=1, TB=60, PB=1,

IDX=65535;

Where, CLS stands for the charge category;

RAT stands for the TA tariff (TA indicates the first metering interval and PA indicates
the number of first pulses. These two parameters and the RAT determine the basic
charge of the first conversation. The above parameters show that the first chargeable
duration takes three minutes as a metering unit. The charge of one metering unit is
145 cents);

PRAT stands for the PB tariff (TB indicates the metering interval and PB indicates the
number of metering pulses. These two parameters and the PRAT determine the unit
charge of later conversation. The above parameters show that the later chargeable
duration takes one minute as a metering unit. The charge of one metering unit is 50
cents);

IDX stands for the discount index, which references the corresponding parameter in
the holiday tariff discount data, weekday tariff discount data and daily tariff discount
data (“65535” means no discount).
18) Add MEM configuration.
ADD MI: MN=1;

Where, MN stands for the SPM module number.

19) Add MEM information.
Add MEM information of various modules. For the SM 87 and SM 89 that are not
configured with MEM boards, only configure the MEM data.

ADD MEMCFG: MDU=1, GWIP="10.11.0.0", MASK="255.255.255.0";

ADD MEMCFG: MDU=85, SYSNO=NO7, GRP=0, MIP0="10.11.25.34",

MIP1="10.11.25.36", SIP0="10.11.31.1", PORT=5600, GWIP="10.11.0.0",
MASK="255.255.255.0";

ADD MEMCFG: MDU=87, SYSNO=NO7, GRP=1, MIP0="10.11.25.37",

MIP1="10.11.25.37", SIP0="10.11.31.1", PORT=5600, GWIP="10.11.0.0",
MASK="255.255.255.0";

3-38
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

ADD MEMCFG: MDU=89, SYSNO=NO7, GRP=2, MIP0="10.11.25.38",

MIP1="10.11.25.38", SIP0="10.11.31.1", PORT=5600, GWIP="10.11.0.0",
MASK="255.255.255.0";

Where, MDU stands for the module number; GRP for the MEM card group number;
MIP0 and MIP1 stand for the respective IP address of the two MEM boards; SIP0 and
SIP1 stand for the respective IP address of the SCPs; PORT stands for the SCP port
number; GWIP stands for the IP address of the gateway; MASK stands for the
network mask code.

Set the parameter "System number" to the default value to select “NO7” for the IN
service.

3-39
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Note:
Generally, the office information is set in the hardware configuration instead of the intelligent service
configuration.
This example includes the configuration procedures of the standard intelligent network. In the standard
intelligent network, the SSP communicates with the SCP through the SS7.
The relatively perfect network layer function is provided through the combination of the SCCP and MTP
in the standard intelligent network. For the data configuration, except the SS7 part, the SCP
configuration data and SCCP data are required to configure.
For the configuration principle of the INAP links, refer to 3.1.2 Configuration Principles and Cautions.
For MEM information, all SMs should be configured no matter whether the MEM board exists.
For the standard intelligent network, the configuration procedures are as follows:
No. Command name Command function
1 ADD CNACLD Add call prefix*
2 ADD AUSSIG Add supplementary signaling.*
3 SET OFI Set local office information*
4 ADD N7DSP Add MTP DPC*
5 ADD N7LKS Add MTP link set*
6 ADD N7RT Add MTP route*
7 ADD N7LNK/ADD SPMN7LNK Add MTP link/SPM MTP link*
8 ADD ACCODE Add access code
9 ADD TDPCFG Add TDP configuration
10 ADD SCPCFG Add SCP configuration
11 ADD SCPADR Add SCP physical address description
12 ADD SSPADR Add SSP physical address description
13 ADD SCCPDPC Add SCCP DPC
14 ADD SCCPSSN Add SCCP subsystem
15 ADD SSPSRC Add SSP specialized resource function
16 ADD CHGCLS Add charging category

“*” indicates that you can refer to other volume of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands. No more description will be given in the following
section.

3-40
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

3.8.2 Configuring INAP Signaling Link Data

I. Example

1) Basic data
In the SM configuration, the INAP signaling link adopts the 24-digit signaling point
code. The office signaling point is “aaabbb”. The destination signaling point is
“111222” (corresponding to the SCP0). Four links are configured between two
signaling points. The signaling link codes are respectively 0, 1, 3 and 4. The circuit
number is the time slot 16 of relevant PCM. Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4 show the
hardware configuration.

2 7 Front panel of the DTF frame 16 21

P D D P
T T
W F W
F
C C

Figure 3-3 Boards in the trunk frame

2 Front panel of the control frame 17

P N N N E M L L P
O O O M P P P
W D D D A U N N W
B B 7 7
S C C S
N N
K K
P S S M V E E P
V
I I P T T
W G G U W
C C

Figure 3-4 Boards in the control frame

According to Figure 3-3, the start trunk circuit numbers of both DTF boards are
respectively 192 to 255 and 256 to 319. According to Figure 3-4, the ranges of the link
numbers of both boards are respectively 4 to 7 and 8 to 9.

The ET16 board in Slot 5 is allocated with two circuits, which respectively occupy the
E0 and E1. The ET16 board in Slot 6 is also allocated with two circuits, which
respectively occupy the E0 and E1.

The LPN7 boards in Slot 17 and Slot 18 are respectively allocated with two links,
which are link 0 and link 1.

3-41
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Note:
z In the current SM, each LPN7 board supports at most four links, but one SM supports at most eight
SS7 signaling processing boards. Number the links from the MEM board and the board number
ranges from 0 to 4 and 5 to 9.
z The start link number of the board is the product of the board number and 4.
z The MEM slot cannot be configured with SS7 signaling processing board.
z For the configuration principle of relevant INAP links, refer to 3.1.2 Configuration Principles and
Cautions.

2) Preset conditions
z The SM 85 works normally.
z The trunk frame and relevant DTF boards have been configured. The boards
work normally.
z Necessary boards such as LPN7 have been added and the boards work
normally.

II. Precedures

No. Command name Command function

1 ADD N7DSP Add MTP DPC*
2 ADD N7LKS Add MTP link set*
3 ADD N7RT Add MTP route*
4 ADD N7LNK Add MTP link*
5 ADD SCPADR Add SCP physical address description
6 ADD SSPADR Add SSP physical address description
7 ADD SCCPDPC Add SCCP DPC
8 ADD SCCPSSN Add SCCP subsystem

Note:
“*” indicates that you can refer to other volume of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands. No more description will be given in the following
section.

III. Configuration

1) Add MTP destination signaling point.

3-42
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

z Query destination signaling points.

LST N7DSP:

Query destination signaling points to find an unused destination signaling point. Here
suppose the destination signaling point index “1” is unused.
z Add a destination signaling point.
ADD N7DSP: DPX=1, NPC="111222";

Where, DPX stands for the DSP index, which will be referenced by the MTP route
data;

NPC stands for the national network code, which will be referenced by the SSP
physical address description data, SCCP subsystem data and SCCP remote
signaling point data.
2) Add an MTP link set.
z Query MTP link sets.
LST N7LKS:

Query MTP link sets to find an unused link set. Here suppose the link set "2" is
unused.
z Add an MTP link set.
ADD N7LKS: LS=2, LSN="SCP link set", APX=2, LKS=3;

Where, LS stands for the link set, which will be referenced by the MTP route data;

LSN stands for the link set title;

APX stands for the adjacent DSP index, which references the corresponding
parameter in the MTP DPC data directly;

LKS stands for the link selection code, which specifies how to select MTP links.
3) Add an MTP route.
ADD N7RT: RN="RT1", LS=2, DPX=1;

Where, RN stands for the route title;

LS for the link set, which references the corresponding parameter in the MTP link set.

DPX stands for the DSP index, which references the corresponding parameter in the
MTP DPC table.
4) Add MTP links.
z Add SM MTP links.
According to Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4 and the basic data in the example, add MTP
links.

3-43
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

ADD N7LNK: MN=85, LNK=4, LKN="TO SCP_1", C=208, LS=2, SLC=1;

ADD N7LNK: MN=85, LNK=5, LKN="TO SCP_2", C=240, LS=2, SLC=2;

ADD N7LNK: MN=85, LNK=8, LKN="TO SCP_3", C=272, LS=2, SLC=3;

ADD N7LNK: MN=85, LNK=9, LKN="TO SCP_4", C=304, LS=2, SLC=4;

Where, MN stands for the module number; LNK stands for the link number; LKN
stands for the link title; C stands for the circuit number;

LS stands for the link set, which references the corresponding parameter in the MTP
link set data;

SLC stands for the signaling link code, which is the logical code in the signaling link
set and cannot be repeated in the link set.
5) Add SCP physical address description.
ADD SCPADR: SCP=0, DPCF=TRUE, SSNF=TRUE, RT=DPC, DPC="111222",
NID=NAT, SSN=INAP;

Where, SCP stands for the SCP number, which directly references the corresponding
parameter in the basic data in the example;

DPCF stands for the DPC flag; SSNF for the SSN flag; RT for the route flag;

NID stands for the network ID; SSN for the sub-system number;

DPC stands for the DPC address, which directly references the corresponding
parameter in the basic data in the example.
6) Add SSP physical address description.
ADD SSPADR: SCP=0, DPCF=TRUE, SSNF=TRUE, RT=DPC, DPC="aaabbb",
NID=NAT, SSN=INAP;

DPC stands for DPC address. This parameter directly cites the corresponding
parameter in the basic data in the example.

Where, DPC stands for the DPC address, which references the corresponding
parameter in the basic data in the example directly.

For the meanings of other parameters, refer to the above step.

7) Add SCCP remote DPC.
z Query SCCP remote DPCs.
LST SCCPDPC:

Query SCCP remote signaling points to find the unused remote signaling point index.
Here suppose the remote signaling point index "1" is unused.
z Add an SCCP remote DPC.

3-44
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

ADD SCCPDPC: SPCINDEX=1, SPC2="111222", SHAREDPCI=65535;

Where, SPCINDEX stands for the remote signaling point index;

SPC2 stands for the national network code, which references the corresponding
parameter in the MTP DPC data directly;

SHAREDPCI stands for the load share signaling point index.

z Query the status of the SCCP remote DPC.
DSP SCCPDPC: MN=85, DPC="111222";

DSP N7DPC: MN=85, DPX=1;

The both results should be consistent.

8) Add SCCP subsystems.
z Query SCCP subsystems.
LST SCCPSSN:

Query SCCP subsystems to find an unused table index. Here suppose the subsystem
table indexes 8 to 11 are unused.
z Add SCCP subsystems.
ADD SCCPSSN: SSNINDEX=8, SSNNETNUM=CN, SSNCODE=INAP,
DPCCODE="aaabbb", BAKINDEX=65535;

ADD SCCPSSN: SSNINDEX=9, SSNNETNUM=CN, SSNCODE=SCMG,

DPCCODE="aaabbb", BAKINDEX=65535;

ADD SCCPSSN: SSNINDEX=10, SSNNETNUM=CN, SSNCODE=INAP,

DPCCODE="111222", BAKINDEX=65535;

ADD SCCPSSN: SSNINDEX=11, SSNNETNUM=CN, SSNCODE=SCMG,

DPCCODE="111222", BAKINDEX=65535;

Where, SSNINDEX stands for the subsystem index;

SSNNETNUM stands for the network number of subsystem (here CN stands for
"National");

SSNCODE stands for the SSN code, which is set to “INAP” and “SCCP
management”;

DPCCODE stands for the DPC, which references the corresponding parameter in the
basic data in the example;

BAKINDEX stands for the standby subsystem index.

z Query the status of the SCCP subsystems.
DSP SCCPSSN: MN=85, DPC="aaabbb", SSN=SCCPMAN;

3-45
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

DSP SCCPSSN: MN=85, DPC="aaabbb", SSN=INAP;

DSP SCCPSSN: MN=85, DPC="111222", SSN=SCCPMAN;

DSP SCCPSSN: MN=85, DPC="111222", SSN=INAP;

The SCCP sub-system is applicable. The statuses of the remote SCCP system,
remote SCCP subsystem and the SCCP signaling point should be consistent with
each other.

3.8.3 Configuring Intelligent Card Service

I. Example

1) Basic data
Add one "17911" service and "17912" service on the SSP where the relevant
intelligent service is in service. The "17911" service is a one-stage dialing intelligent
card service. Table 3-7 shows the charging requirements of both the IN services.

Table 3-7 Charging table

TB First
Metering
Charging PA charging independent metering Discount
interval
category tariff charging interval index
(Minute)
tariff (Minute)
13 30 12 3 1 None

Note:
For the intelligent card service, it is unnecessary to play the prompting tone to the subscriber. If the
connection can be performed just through the subscriber’s dialing the access code and called number,
then the service belongs to the one-stage dialing intelligent card service. The one-stage dialing
intelligent card service can perform authentication and charging only through the caller.

2) Preset conditions
z The SSP has developed relevant IN service. The corresponding SCP number is
SCP1.
z Relevant SPT board and SPD board have the voice resources of this service.

II. Precedures

No. Command name Command function

1 ADD CNACLD Add call prefix*

3-46
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

No. Command name Command function

2 ADD ACCODE Add access code
3 ADD TDPCFG Add TDP configuration
4 ADD SCPCFG Add SCP configuration
5 ADD SSPSRC Add SSP specialized resource function
6 ADD CHGCLS Add charging category

Note:
“*” indicates that you can refer to other volume of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands. No more description will be given in the following
section.

III. Configuration

1) Add call prefixes.

From the basic data, the call prefixes are “17911” and ”17912”. The service category
is “intelligent service”. The charging selection code is “65535”, which means no
charging.

For the "17911" service attribute, select “special function code”. For the "17912"
service attribute, select “intelligent service”.

The minimum number length and maximum number length of respective services are
the corresponding lengths of the access codes.

ADD CNACLD: P=0, PFX=K'17911, CSTP=IN, CSA=SPSFDN, MINL=11, MAXL=24,

CHSC=65535;

ADD CNACLD: P=0, PFX=K'17912, CSTP=IN, CSA=INSVR, MINL=5, MAXL=5,

CHSC=65535;

Where, P stands for DN set; PFX stands for the call prefix; CSTP for the service
category; CSA for the service attribute; MINL for the minimum number length; MAXL
for the maximum number length and CHSC for the charging selection code.

For the one-stage dialing intelligent card service, the minimum number length should
be greater than the sum of the length of the access code and the length of the
maximum area code.
2) Add access codes.
ADD ACCODE: CODE=K'17911, LEN=3, POS=255, DBLEN=255;

3-47
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

ADD ACCODE: CODE=K'17912, LEN=3, POS=255, DBLEN=255;

Where, CODE stands for the access code; POS for the database start position and
DBLEN for the length of database field. There is certain association between the
database number of the SPC configuration data and these two data.
3) Add TDP configuration.
At present, the DP number is “3”, the DP standard number is usually the access code,
and the service key is the same as the access code.

ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, DPCNO=ACODE, CODE=K'17911, SKEY=17911;

ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, DPCNO=ACODE, CODE=K'17912, SKEY=17912;

Where, DPNO stands for the DP number; DPCNO stands for the DP standard number;
CODE stands for the access code; SKEY stands for the service key.

Choose the default values for the R/N flag and auxiliary flag.
4) Add SCP configuration.
From the description data of the access code, the database number is known as
"65535". The database number of the "17911" service and "17912" service is “SCP1”.

ADD SCPCFG: SKEY=17911, DB=65535, SCP1=YES;

ADD SCPCFG: SKEY=17912, DB=65535, SCP1=YES;

Where, SKEY stands for the service key, which references the corresponding
parameter in the TDP configuration directly;

SCPi stands for the SCP number, which references the corresponding parameter in
the preset conditions directly.
5) Add SSP specialized resource function.
ADD SSPSRC: SKEY=17912, MN=255;

Where, SKEY stands for the service key and MN stands for the module number.
6) Add a charging category.
The basic cycle of the IN charging is one seconds, that is, a metering unit should be
one second at least. The first metering interval may be set to 180 seconds, which
corresponds to a first metering pulse (first metering unit), and the later metering
interval may be set to 60 seconds, which corresponds to a metering pulse (metering
unit).

ADD CHGCLS: CLS=13, RAT=30, PRAT=12, TA=180, PA=1, TB=60, PB=1,

IDX=65535;

Where, CLS stands for the charge category;

3-48
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

RAT stands for the TA tariff (TA indicates the first metering interval and PA indicates
the number of first pulses. These two parameters and the RAT determine the basic
charge of the first conversation. The above parameters show that the first chargeable
duration takes three minutes as a metering unit. The charge of each metering unit is
30 cents);

PRAT stands for the PB tariff (TB indicates the metering interval and PB indicates the
number of metering pulses. These two parameters and the PRAT determine the unit
charge of later conversation. The above parameters show that the later chargeable
duration takes one minute as a metering unit. The charge of each metering unit is 12
cents);

IDX stands for the discount index, which is set to "65535" if no discount.

Note:
z For one-stage dialing intelligent card service, the service attribute in the service prefix should be
“special function code”. If the number of received digits equals the "minimum number length", the
SSP will report the message to the SCP and the SCP will immediately send messages to make the
SSP process the called number. The SSP will perform the route selection analysis after the deletion
of the access code (such as 17911) preceding the called number.
z In the basic prefix data, when the “service attribute” is “intelligent service”, if the number of received
digits equals the ”maximum number length”, the SSP will immediately trigger the IN service and
perform detection. If the number of received digits equals the ”minimum number length” and no other
number is received within five seconds, the SSP will trigger the IN service and perform detection
after five seconds (Some earlier versions do not support the 5-second-delayed triggering
mechanism, and the call will be released). When the “service attribute” is “special function code”, as
long as the number of received digits equals the “minimum number length”, the SSP will immediately
trigger the IN service, perform detection and continue to receive digits.
z If the SCP to load the service is new, the SCP physical address description data and the SSP
physical address description data should be configured.
z For one-stage dialing intelligent card service, the SSP SRF data may not be configured.

3.8.4 Modifying Charging Data

I. Example

1) Basic data
The "17911" service is available on some SSP, and no discount is allowed for the
charging. Configure the charging data according to the following requirement.

3-49
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Charge a toll call 0.07 dollars per six seconds. During the discount period (0:00--7:00),
charge a toll call 0.035 dollars per six seconds, and during the discount period
(21:30--24:00), charge it 0.05 dollars per six seconds.

On Saturday, charge a toll call 0.05 dollars per six seconds, and on Sunday, charge it
0.035 dollars per six seconds. During the period of National Day, charge it 0.035
dollars per six seconds.

If the conversation duration is longer than 2.5 hours, reduce 25% on the basis of the
current discount.

Charging begins when each conversation exceeds two minutes.

According to the above, the basic charge is as shown in Table 3-8, and the charging
discounts are as shown in Table 3-9, Table 3-10 and Table 3-11.

Table 3-8 Charging table

PA
TB independent First metering First interval
charging Discount index
charging tariff interval (minute) (minute)
tariff
10 10 6 6 None

Table 3-9 Holiday discount

Discou
nt start Discou Addition
Holiday Holida Tariff Tariff Addition
Holiday time nt end al tariff
y discount valu al tariff
(Year) (Month) on time on discount
(Day) style e value
holida holiday style
y
00:00:0 24:00:0 Discount
2002 10 1 35 None
1 0 by Percent
00:00:0 24:00:0 Discount
2002 10 2 35 None
1 0 by Percent
00:00:0 24:00:0 Discount
2002 10 3 35 None
1 0 by Percent

3-50
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Table 3-10 Weekday discount

Addition
Start time of End time of Tariff
Tariff al tariff Additional
Day weekday weekday discount
value discount tariff value
discount discount style
style
Saturda Discount by
00:00:01 24:00:00 50 None
y Percent
Discount by
Sunday 00:00:01 24:00:00 35 None
Percent

Table 3-11 Daily discount

Additional
Start time of End time of Tariff
tariff Additional
daily daily discount Tariff value
discount tariff value
discount discount style
style

Discount by
00:00:01 07:30:00 35 None
Percent
Discount by
07:31:01 21:00:00 70 None
Percent

Discount by
21:00:01 24:00:00 50 None
Percent

2) Preset conditions
The charging category of the "17911" service is Category 3.

II. Precedures

No. Command name Command function

1 ADD HLDDIS Add holiday tariff discount
2 ADD WEKDIS Add weekday tariff discount
3 ADD NRMDIS Add daily tariff discount
4 MOD CHGCLS Modify charging category

III. Configuration

1) Add holiday tariff discount.

z Query charging categories.
LST CHGCLS;

3-51
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Query charging categories to find an unused discount index. Here, suppose “11” is
unused.
z Add holiday tariff discount.
ADD HLDDIS: IDX=11, YEAR=2002, MON=OCT, DAY=1, STM="00:00:01",
ETM="24:00:00", RS=PERCENT, DIS=35;

ADD HLDDIS: IDX=11, YEAR=2002, MON=OCT, DAY=2 STM="00:00:01",

ETM="24:00:00", RS=PERCENT, DIS=35;

ADD HLDDIS: IDX=11, AR=2002, MON=OCT, DAY=3 STM="00:00:01",

ETM="24:00:00", RS=PERCENT, DIS=35;

Where, IDX stands for the discount index, which will be referenced in the weekday
discount data, daily discount data and charging category data;

YEAR stands for the year of the holiday; MON stands for the month of the holiday;
DAY stands for the day of the holiday (these three parameters decide the holiday
data);

STM stands for the start time of the holiday; ETM stands for the end time of the
holiday;

RS stands for the tariff discount style; DIS for the tariff value.

The above parameters directly reference the corresponding parameters in Table 3-9.
2) Add weekday tariff discount.
ADD WEKDIS: IDX=11, WEK=SAT, STM="00:00:01", ETM="24:00:00",
RS=PERCENT, DIS=50;

ADD WEKDIS: IDX=11, WEK=SUN, STM="00:00:01", ETM="24:00:00",

RS=PERCENT, DIS=35;

Where, IDX stands for the discount index, which references the corresponding
parameter in the holiday discount data;

WEK stands for a weekday; STM for the start time of the weekday discount; and ETM
for the end time of the weekday discount;

RS stands for the tariff discount style and DIS for the tariff value.

The above parameters directly reference the corresponding parameters in Table 3-10.
3) Add daily tariff discount.
ADD NRMDIS: IDX=11, STM="00:00:01", ETM="07:30:00", RS=PERCENT, DIS=35;

ADD NRMDIS: IDX=11, STM="07:31:01", ETM="21:30:00", RS=PERCENT, DIS=70

ADD NRMDIS: IDX=11, STM="21:30:01", ETM="24:00:00", RS=PERCENT, DIS=50;

3-52
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Where, IDX stands for the discount index, which references the corresponding
parameter in the holiday discount data;

STM stands for the start time of the daily discount; ETM stands for the end time of the
daily discount;

RS stands for the tariff discount style and DIS for the tariff value.

The above parameters directly reference the corresponding parameters in Table 3-11.
4) Modify the charging category.
MOD CHGCLS: CLS=3, RAT=10, PRAT=10, TA=6, PA=1, TB=6, PB=1, IDX=11,
MINTM=120, IDX=11;

Where, CLS stands for the charge category, which directly references the
corresponding parameter in the preset condition in the example;

RAT stands for the TA tariff (TA indicates the first metering interval and PA indicates
the number of first pulses. These two parameters and the RAT determine the basic
charge of the first conversation. The above parameters show that the first chargeable
duration takes six minutes as a metering unit. The charge of one metering unit is 0.10
dollars);

PRAT stands for the PB tariff (TB indicates the metering interval and PB indicates the
number of metering pulses. These two parameters and the PRAT determine the unit
charge of later conversation. The above parameters show that the later chargeable
duration takes six seconds as a metering unit. The charge of one metering unit is 0.10
dollars);

MINTM stands for the minimum charging time, which is expressed in second and
directly references the corresponding parameter in the basic data in the example;

IDX stands for the discount index, which references the corresponding parameter in
the holiday tariff discount data.
5) Add conversation duration discount.
ADD TIMEDIS: IDX=11, MINTM=150, DIS=75;

Where, IDX stands for the discount index, which directly references the
corresponding parameter in the charging category data;

MINTM stands for the conversation duration, expressed in minute;

DIS stands for the tariff value.

Set the tariff discount style to “Discount by percent”.

The above parameters directly reference the corresponding parameters in the basic
data in the example.

3-53
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

3.8.5 Configuring NP Incoming Call Service

I. Example

The Number Portability (NP) service implements the function that after the telephone
set is moved to another position, its telephone number is not changed.

The NP incoming call service means that when other subscriber dials the old number
of the NP subscriber, the call may be connected to the telephone set through the new
number of the NP subscriber. Here “incoming” means the NP subscriber is the called
party, but the called number is the old number instead of the new number. This kind of
service supports the following cases:
z Send the number change announcement and process the NP incoming call.
z Send the number change announcement to the caller of a NP incoming call. Not
forward the call until it is released.
z Send no number change announcement for a NP incoming call until the call is
forwarded to the NP telephone set.
The resources of new and old numbers are required for the NP subscriber.
1) Basic data
The subscriber whose new telephone number is 6598123 has applied for the NP
incoming call service, so as to keep the old telephone number for a period of time. The
subscriber’s old telephone number is 4698123.
2) Preset conditions
z The SSP data has been configured to trigger normal intelligent service.
z The NP service has been configured in the SMAP, and the NP incoming call
service has been loaded on the local SCP1.
z The charging data of this service can share the existing charging data.
z The DN set of the subscriber 6598123 is 0.

II. Precedures

No. Command name Command function

1 CHG DN Set a subscriber to be in the number-changed state*
2 ADD DNC Add number change*
3 ADD CFPRO Add failure processing record*
4 ADD CNACLD Add call prefix*
5 ADD ACCODE Add access code
6 ADD TDPCFG Add TDP configuration
7 ADD SCPCFG Add SCP configuration
8 ADD SSPSRC Add SSP specialized resource function

3-54
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Note:
“*” indicates that you can refer to other volume of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands. No more description will be given in the following
section.

III. Configuration

1) Set a subscriber to be in the number-changed state.

Set the old number 4698123 to be in the number-changed state.

CHG DN: P=0, D=K'4698123;

Where, P stands for the DN set and D for the old number.
2) Add a number change record.
z Query number change records.
LST DNC:;

Query number change records to find an unused number change index. Suppose the
number change index "12" is unused.
z Add a number change record.
Add the number change data with the number change index 12, and insert "500"
before the start number.

ADD DNC: DCX=12, DCT=INS, DCP=0, ND=K'500;

Where, DCX stands for the number change index, which will be referenced by the
failure processing data;

DCT stands for the number change type, which is set to "insert number" here;

DCP stands for the change location, which is set to "0" here (means to insert the
number at the very beginning);

ND stands for the new telephone number, which is set to “500” here.
3) Add a failure processing record.
The failure cause is “user defined 1” (telephone moved, but number remained), the
failure source code is “0”, the failure processing type is "re-analyze after number
change" and the number change index is “12”.

ADD CFPRO: P=0, FCC=UDI, FSC=0, FPT=CPA, DCX=12;

Where, P stands for the Dn set, which is "0" here (means that this failure processing
record is applicable for all the numbers whose DN set is “0”);

3-55
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

FCC stands for the fail cause code;

FSC stands for the fail source code, which is not used here and whose value is “0” ("0"
is the default value of the corresponding parameter in the call source data);

FPT stands for the processing type;

DCX stands for the number change index, which references the corresponding
parameter in the number change data.
4) Add a call prefix.
The added call prefix is “500”, the service category is “intelligent service”, the service
attribute is "special function code", the charging selection code is “65535”, indicating
no charging, the minimum number length is “11” and the maximum number length is
“24”.

ADD CNACLD: P=0, PFX=K'500, CSTP=IN, CSA=SPSFDN, MINL=11, MAXL=24,

CHSC=65535;

Where, P stands for DN set; PFX stands for the call prefix; CSTP for the service
category;

CSA stands for the service attribute, which is set to "special function code";

MINL stands for the minimum number length, whose value is the sum of 3 and the
length of the local subscriber number;

MAXL stands for the maximum number length, which is set to “24” usually;

CHSC stands for the charging selection code.

5) Add an access code.
ADD ACCODE: CODE=K'500, LEN=3, POS=255, DBLEN=255;

Where, CODE stands for the access code; POS for the database start position;
DBLEN for the length of database field.
6) Add TDP configuration.
ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, DPCNO=ACODE, CODE=K'500, SKEY=500;

Where, DPNO stands for the DP number; DPCNO stands for the DP standard number;
CODE stands for the access code and SKEY stands for the service key.
7) Add SCP configuration.
ADD SCPCFG: SKEY=500, DB=65535, SCP1=YES;

Where, SKEY stands for the service key, which references the corresponding
parameter in the TDP configuration data directly;

DB stands for the database number;

3-56
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

SCPi stands for the SCP number, which references the corresponding parameter in
the preset condition.
8) Add SSP specialized resource function.
ADD SSPSRC: SKEY=500, MN=255;

Where, SKEY stands for the service key and MN stands for the module number.

Note:
If the terminal exchange is the exchange of other company, ensure the number dialed by the NP
subscriber can be converted to "500+NP number" in the data configuration and can access the SSP.
If the terminal exchange is a C&C08 exchange, the prefix should be set as follows so as to access the
SSP.
Service Minimum Maximum
Call prefix Service attribute
category number length number length
3+ length of the
500 Basic services Local/national toll local subscriber 24
number

3.8.6 Configuring NP Outgoing Call Service

I. Example

The NP outgoing call service means that when other number is dialed through the NP
telephone set, the calling number to be sent is not the new number of the NP
telephone set, but the old number of the NP telephone set.

The resources of the new and old numbers are required for the NP subscriber.
1) Basic data
The subscriber whose new number is 6598123 has applied for the NP outgoing call
service.
2) Preset conditions
z The SSP data has been configured to trigger normal intelligent service.
z The NP service has been configured in the SMAP, and the NP service has been
loaded on the local SCP1.
z The call source code and DN set of the subscriber whose number is 6598123 are
both 0.
z The charging data of this service can share the existing charging data.

3-57
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

II. Precedures

No. Command name Command function

1 ADD DNC Add number change*
2 ADD CALLSRC Add call source*
3 MOD ST Modify subscriber attribute*
4 ADD CNACLD Add call prefix*
5 ADD ACCODE Add access code
6 ADD TDPCFG Add TDP configuration
7 ADD SCPCFG Add SCP configuration

Note:
“*” indicates that you can refer to other volume of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System – Operation
Manual for detailed descriptions of the commands. No more description will be given in the following
section.

III. Configuration

1) Add a number change record.

z Query number change records.
LST DNC:

Query number change records to find an unused number change index. Suppose the
number change index "12" is unused.
z Add a number change record.
Add the number change data with the number change index 12, and insert "501"
before the start number.

ADD DNC: DCX=12, DCT=INS, DCP=0, ND=K'501;

Where, DCX stands for the number change index, which will be referenced by the call
source data;

DCT stands for the number change type, which is set to "insert number" here;

DCP stands for the change location, which is set to "0" here (means to insert the
number at the very beginning);

ND stands for the new telephone number, which is set to “501” here.
2) Add a call source.

3-58
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

z Query call sources.

LST CALLSRC:

Query call sources to find an unused call source. Suppose the call source "4" is
unused here.
z Add a call source.
ADD CALLSRC: CSC=4, PRDN=1, P=0, DCF=YES, DCX=12;

Where, CSC stands for the call source; PRDN for the pre-receive number digits;

P for the DN set, which directly references the corresponding parameter in the preset
conditions;

DCF stands for the number preparation, which should be set to “YES” when it is
necessary to perform number change for the subscribers of the call source;

DCX stands for the all number change index, which references the corresponding
parameter in the number change data.
3) Modify subscriber attributes.
Modify the attributes of the NP subscriber whose telephone number is 6598123.
Change the call source to 4 so that the number change (insert the access code "501"
before the called number) can be performed when the subscriber dials.

MOD ST: D=K'6598123, CSC=4;

4) Add a call prefix.
The added call prefix is “501”, the service category is “intelligent service”, the service
attribute is "special function code", the charging selection code is “65535”, the
minimum number length is “6” and the maximum number length is “24”.

ADD CNACLD: P=0, PFX=K'500, CSTP=IN, CSA=SPSFDN, MINL=6, MAXL=24,

CHSC=65535;

Where, P stands for DN set, which directly references the corresponding data in the
preset condition;

PFX stands for the call prefix; CSTP for the service category;

CSA stands for the service attribute, which is set to "special function code";

MINL stands for the minimum number length, whose value is the sum of 3 and the
length of the local subscriber number;

MAXL stands for the maximum number length, which is set to “24” usually;

CHSC stands for the charging selection code.

5) Add an access code.

3-59
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

ADD ACCODE: CODE=K'501, LEN=3, POS=255, DBLEN=255;

Where, CODE stands for the access code; POS for the database start position;
DBLEN for the length of database field.
6) Add TDP configuration.
ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, DPCNO=ACODE, CODE=K'501, SKEY=500;

Where, DPNO stands for the DP number; DPCNO stands for the DP standard number;
CODE stands for the access code and SKEY stands for the service key. Generally the
service key of the NP outgoing call service is the same as the service key of the NP
incoming call service.
7) Add SCP configuration.
ADD SCPCFG: SKEY=500, DB=65535, SCP1=YES;

Where, SKEY stands for the service key; DB stands for the database number;

SCPi stands for the SCP number, which references the corresponding parameter in
the preset condition.

3-60
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 3 Intelligent Service Configuration

Note:
If the terminal exchange is the exchange of other vendor, ensure the number dialed by the NP subscriber
can be converted to "501 + called number" in the data configuration and can access the SSP.
If the terminal exchange is a C&C08 exchange, the call prefix in the terminal exchange should be set as
follows, so as to access the SSP.
Service Minimum Maximum
Call prefix Service attribute
category number length number length
3+minimum
length of the local
501 Basic services Local/national toll 24
subscriber
number

If the office directions "500" and "501" exist, the inserted access code may be "a501" so as to differ from
the NP service.
The call prefixes “501b” and “501c” can be configured so that the intelligent service will not be triggered
when the NP subscriber dials the supplementary service prefixes such as “*”, “#”. When the system has
the above prefixes, it will delete the prefixes.
The SSP data configuration is restricted by the SMAP charging data to some degree. If the number
length of the offices whose charging is carried out separately is different on the SMAP, the SSP should
divide the office directions into several groups according to the number length. Each group corresponds
to a specific "501" prefix data. Suppose there are two office directions "6543" and "251", the office "251"
cannot call through the office "6543" when the minimum number length is set to 6; or the office "6543"
cannot call the number "114" when the minimum number length is set to 7. To solve the problem, set the
call prefix to "501" and "5011", and the minimum number length for the former office direction to 7 and for
the latter one to 6.

3-61
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

4.1 Preset Conditions

Figure 4-1 shows the networking of some offices.

1000 V5ASLs

Access Server SCP AN

4
x
E1
/P
RA
SS7
End office
20 x
Signaling point: 13EFEE E1/S
S7
2 lin
ks
OLT

Tandem office
40 x
Signaling point: 13EFAA E1/ AM/CM
SS7
2 lin +2 x SPM 8 SM 31
ks xE
+1 x SMC 1 900 ASLs
10 x E1/SS7
Toll office 2 links RSM 101
Signaling point: 13EF23 4 x E1/SS7 Local office 1800 ASLs and
Signaling point: 13EFCC 8 DSLs

Figure 4-1 Networking diagram

I. Trunk data

The tandem office acts as the alternative route of the toll office and the end office.
All the SS7 office directions adopt the direct connection modes. The tandem office
is also the backup signaling route of the end office.

II. Charging data

z The calls of the prefixes 110, 112 and 120 are free of charge and they go
through the tandem office.
z The number segment of the local office is 8880000-8889999. It adopts the
meter 1 for the inter-office charging with the charging mode of “2/180+1/60”,
and the charging tariff is 0.11 dollars.
z The calls of the local prefix 222 go to the end office. They adopt the meter 2
with the charging mode of “1/60+1/60”, and the charging tariff is 0.18 dollars.

4-1
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

z The calls of the local prefix 333 and 444 go through the tandem office. They
adopt the meter 3 with the charging mode of “1/60+1/60", and the charging
tariff is 0.20 dollars.
z The dial-up prefix 163 for Internet access is sent to the access server through
PRA trunk circuits. It adopts the meter 4 with the charging mode of
“1/60+1/60”, and the charging tariff is 0.02 dollars.
Perform the called charging for the server accessing and adopt the meter 6
with the charging mode of “1/60+1/60”, and the charging tariff is 0.02 dollars.
z The calls of the local special service prefix 114 go through the tandem office.
They adopt the meter 1 with the charging mode of “2/180+0/60”.
z For Centrex groups, the intra-group calls will not be charged.
z Provide the detailed ticket for the toll call, which goes through the toll office.
z Provide the detailed ticket for the incoming call of the tandem office.
z There is no discount from Monday to Friday. The discount on Saturday is 0.85,
and it is 0.5 on Sunday.

III. Subscriber data

z Configure 1 000 ordinary subscribers for the SM 31, in which there are 500
Centrex subscribers. The telephone numbers are 8880000 to 8880999, and
the Centrex numbers are 8880000 to 8880499. Of the 1 000 subscribers,
there are seven digital subscribers whose numbers are the even numbers
within the segment 8880002 to 8880015.
z The Centrex console number is 88888888 and the console extension number
is 8888. The group name is “Hotel” and the group number is 0. The out-group
prefix is 0. The secondary dialing tone is desired. The access code of the
console is 9 and the occupied equipment port number is 0.
z Configure 1 800 ordinary subscribers to the RSM. The numbers are 8882000
to 8883799 and the corresponding equipment numbers are 0 to 1799. Among
the subscribers, the first 10 are PBX subscribers. The PBX indicating number
is 8887777 and the occupied equipment port number is 1800.

IV. V5 data

z There are 1 000 V5 ST subscribers, of which, 300 subscribers are Centrex

subscribers. The occupied numbers are 8881000 to 8881999, of which, the
Centrex numbers are 8881000 to 8881299.
z The L3 addresses are 100 to 1099.
z The protection group 1 of the V5.2-interface is adopted. The V5-interface ID
is 0, the variable value is 0 and the logical C-channel ID of the primary link is
0.
z There are eight links in total in the interface and the link IDs are 0-7.

4-2
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

V. PRA data

Configure four PRA trunks to connect directly to the 163 access server.

VI. IN service data

The C842SPC board is used in the SPM, and the CB34MPU board in the SM.

For the calls of the "300" service, the first three minutes will be charged 1.45
dollars, and 0.50 dollars for the following every minute, and there is no discount.

4.2 Hardware Configuration

4.2.1 Hardware Data

According to the general requirements, the configurations of the AM/CM and SPM
of the C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System are as follows.
z There are four racks in total, one Line Interface Module (LIM) rack, one AM
rack, one SRM rack, and one SPM rack.
z There are four SPMs, which occupy two SPM frames. One frame is
configured with two SPMs. The other two SPMs in another frame are standby
modules (only one board is configured).
z There are three LIMs.
Among them, two interface frames has two 40M Optic Interface Boards
(OBCs), which are connected to the SM in the load-sharing mode, 12 ET16
boards providing 192 E1s, and two STU boards providing 126 E1s. These
E1s provide relevant trunks externally, or connect the RSM.

Another interface frame has four MHI boards.

z The SRM occupies one frame that has two SPD boards and two Resources
Sharing Board (SRC) providing system resources.
Table 4-1 shows the configuration of the four AM/CM racks.

Table 4-1 Configuration of the four AM/CM racks

Interface rack Main control rack SRM rack SPM rack

Fan box Fan box Fan box Fan box
Power distribution
Power distribution box Power distribution box Power distribution box
box

Empty frame CNET Empty frame Empty frame

Optical trough Front panel Dummy optical trough Dummy optical trough
Empty frame CNET SRM #18 Empty frame

4-3
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Interface rack Main control rack SRM rack SPM rack

Optical trough Optical area Dummy optical trough Dummy optical trough
LIM #5 CPM Empty frame SPM #21
Optical trough Dummy optical trough Optical trough Dummy optical trough
LIM #4 CKM/CCM LIM #16 LIM #20
Optical trough Dummy optical trough Optical trough Dummy optical trough
Fan box Fan box Fan box Fan box

Figure 4-2 to Figure 4-5 show the configuration of the boards in the four AM/CM
racks.

Fan box
Power distribution box
Empty frame
Optical trough
Empty frame
Optical trough
P E E E E S Q Q E E E E S P
W T T T T T S S T T T T T W
S 1 1 1 1 U I I 1 1 1 1 U S
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
Optical trough
P O O E E E E Q Q P
B B
W C C T T T T S S W
S 1 1 1 1 I I S
6 6 6 6
Optical trough
Fan box

Figure 4-2 Boards in the interface rack

4-4
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Fan box
Power distribution box
P C C C C C C C C B S S B C C C C C C C C P
W N N N N N N N N D P P D N N N N N N N N W
S U U U U U U U U R C C R U U U U U U U U S
Front panel
P S S S S P
W N N N N W
S U U U U S
Optical area
P A C C C C C C C C P
W L P P P P P P P P W
S M C C C C C C C C S
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Dummy optical trough
P C C C C P P F B B F P
W K K K K W W S A A S W
C S S D D C S N C C N S
Dummy optical trough
Fan box

Figure 4-3 Boards in the main control rack

4-5
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Fan box
Power distribution box
Empty frame
Dummy optical trough
P P S S S S
W W P P R R
S S D D C C
Dummy optical trough
Empty frame
Optical trough
P M M M M Q Q P
W H H H H S S W
S I I I I I I S
Optical trough
Fan box

Figure 4-4 Boards in the SRM rack

Fan box
Power distribution box
Empty frame
Dummy optical trough
Empty frame
Dummy optical trough
P S S S S C B B C C C P
W P P P P P C C P P P W
S C C C C C C C C C C S
Dummy optical trough
P S S S S C B B C S S C C C C P
W P P P P P C C P P P P P P P W
S C C C C C C C C C C C C C C S
Dummy optical trough
Fan box

Figure 4-5 Boards in the SPM rack

4-6
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Table 4-2 shows the E1 allocation of the interface frame 5 and Table 4-3 shows the
link allocation.

Table 4-2 E1 allocation of the interface frame 5

E0~E1 E2~E3 E4~E7 E8~E9 E10~15 E16~E19 E20~E63

Slot 2 TUP/1 TUP/1 TUP/1 TUP/1 TUP/1
Slot 3 PRA/1 DT/1
Slot 4 V5/1 V5/1
Slot 5 V5/1 V5/1
Slot 6-7 TUP/1 TUP/1 TUP/1 TUP/1 TUP/1 TUP/1
Slot 14 TUP/2 TUP/2 TUP/2 TUP/2 TUP/2
Slot 15 PRA/2 DT/2
Slot 18-19 TUP/2 TUP/2 TUP/2 TUP/2 TUP/2 TUP/2

Note:
The number after the slash in Table 4-2 means the SPM module number.

The RSM is connected to the interface frame 4, and the allocated E1s are 0#-3#
E1 of the slot 6 and slot 7.

Table 4-3 CPC link allocation

Frame number CPC slot No. Link type Module

20 10 MTP 1
20 13 MTP 2
20 20 V5 1
20 21 V5 1
20 22 PRA 2
20 23 PRA 1

The description of the frames and boards of the SM and RSM is omitted.

4.2.2 Configuration Commands

SET CWSON: SWT=OFF;

4-7
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

SET FMT: STS=OFF;

LOF;

I. Setting the local office information

SET OFI: LOT=CC, NN=TRUE, SN1=NAT, SN2=NAT, SN3=NAT, SN4=NAT,

NPC="13EFCC", NNS=SP24, SCCP=NOLINK, LAC=K'755, LNC=C43;

II. Set module data

ADD AM: AMT=AM128, CT=CT3, BST=0, ROW=0, COL=1;

III. Adding the AM/CM rack

ADD CLKFAM: PN=0, ROW=0, COL=1, SR=S8K0-1&S8K1-1, RL=L8K0-1,

SM=S8K0, SC=L3, SCL=PDH, SCT=AUTO;

ADD CFAM: PN=0, ROW=0, COL=1;

ADD NETFAM: PN=0, ROW=0, COL=1;

ADD IFAM: F=4, ON1=0, ON2=1, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=2, CFG=ET16;

ADD IFAM: F=5, ON1=2, ON2=3, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=2, CFG=ET16;

ADD IFAM: F=16, ON1=4, ON2=5, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=3, CFG=MHI;

ADD SRMFRM: FN=18, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=3;

ADD SPMFRM: FN=20, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=4, SPCGS=3;

ADD SPMFRM: FN=21, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=4, SPCGS=3;

/*remove CCMHW*/

Remove CCMHW one by one.

RMV CCMHW: CCM=8;

...

RMV CCMHW: CCM=55;

/*modify the positions of AM boards*/

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=0, S=16;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=0, S=17;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=0, S=22;

4-8
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=0, S=23;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=2, S=9;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=2, S=10;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=2, S=11;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=2, S=12;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=2, S=13;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=2, S=14;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=2, S=15;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=2, S=16;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=2, S=17;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=2, S=18;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=2, S=19;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=2, S=20;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=2;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=3;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=4;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=5;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=14;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=15;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=16;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=17;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=18;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=19;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=20;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=21;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=5, S=6;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=5, S=7;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=5, S=8;

4-9
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=5, S=9;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=5, S=18;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=5, S=19;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=5, S=20;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=5, S=21;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=16, S=6;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=16, S=7;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=16, S=8;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=16, S=9;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=16, S=14;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=16, S=15;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=16, S=16;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=16, S=17;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=16, S=18;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=16, S=19;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=16, S=20;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=16, S=21;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=8;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=9;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=10;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=11;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=12;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=13;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=14;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=15;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=16;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=17;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=18;

4-10
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=19;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=20;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=21;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=22;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=23;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=18, S=24;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=20, S=18;

RMV BRD: MN=0, F=20, S=19;

ADD BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=2, BT=OBC;

ADD BRD: MN=0, F=4, S=4, BT=OBC;

ADD BRD: MN=0, F=5, S=7, BT=STU;

ADD BRD: MN=0, F=5, S=19, BT=STU;

IV. Adding CDB function configuration

ADD CDBFUNC: FCF=PBX, BG=0;

ADD CDBFUNC: FCF=TK, BG=1;

ADD CDBFUNC: FCF=DTR, BG=0;

ADD CDBFUNC: FCF=MFC, BG=0;

ADD CDBFUNC: FCF=FSK, BG=1;

ADD CDBFUNC: FCF=SPD, BG=1;

V. Adding CCMHW configuration

ADD CCMHW: CCM=8, BT=QSI, BN=12, HW=0;

ADD CCMHW: CCM=9, BT=QSI, BN=12, HW=1;

ADD CCMHW: CCM=10, BT=QSI, BN=12, HW=2;

ADD CCMHW: CCM=11, BT=QSI, BN=12, HW=3;

ADD CCMHW: CCM=12, BT=QSI, BN=0, HW=0;

ADD CCMHW: CCM=13, BT=QSI, BN=0, HW=1;

ADD CCMHW: CCM=14, BT=QSI, BN=0, HW=2;

ADD CCMHW: CCM=15, BT=QSI, BN=0, HW=3;

4-11
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

ADD CCMHW: CCM=16, BT=QSI, BN=1, HW=0;

ADD CCMHW: CCM=20, BT=BCC, BN=0, HW=0;

ADD CCMHW: CCM=21, BT=SPC, BN=0, HW=0;

ADD CCMHW: CCM=22, BT=SPC, BN=1, HW=0;

VI. Configuring SPD/SRC resources

ADD SPDCFG: FN=18, BN=4, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2, SHW=0;

ADD SPDCFG: FN=18, BN=5, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=4, SHW=0;

ADD SRCCFG: FN=18, BN=6, DSP1=COF, DSP2=FSK, DSP3=DTR,

DSP4=MFC, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2, SHW=8;

ADD SRCCFG: FN=18, BN=7, DSP1=DTR, DSP2=DTR, DSP3=DTR,

DSP4=DTR, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=4, SHW=8;

VII. Adding configuration of the Alarm Drive Boards (AMD)

ADD AMDCFG: BN=0, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=1;

ADD AMDCFG: BN=1, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=0, TYPE=BAM;

ADD AMDCFG: BN=3, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=2;

ADD AMDCFG: BN=16, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=3;

ADD AMDCFG: BN=17, PN=0, ROW=0, COL=4;

VIII. Adding SPM hardware configuration

ADD SPM: MN=1, FN=20, BN=3;

ADD SPM: MN=2, FN=20, BN=7;

/*MTP link*/

ADD CPCCFG: FN=20, BN=10, MN=1, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2, SHW=30;

ADD CPCCFG: FN=20, BN=13, MN=2, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2, SHW=31;

/*PRA link*/

ADD CPCCFG: FN=20, BN=23, MN=1, LKT=PRA, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2,

SHW=28;

ADD CPCCFG: FN=20, BN=22, MN=2, LKT=PRA, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2,

SHW=29;

/*V5 link*/

4-12
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

ADD CPCCFG: FN=20, BN=21, MN=1, LKT=V5, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2, SHW=26;

ADD CPCCFG: FN=20, BN=20, MN=1, LKT=V5, LIMFN=16, MHIBN=2, SHW=27;

ADD SPME1: FN=5, BN=2, SN=0, EN=15, MN=1;

ADD SPME1: FN=5, BN=3, SN=0, EN=1, MN=1, DID=PRA;

ADD SPME1: FN=5, BN=3, SN=8, EN=9, MN=1, DID=DT, MOD=CAS;

ADD SPME1: FN=5, BN=4, SN=0, EN=3, MN=1, DID=V5TK, MOD=CCS;

ADD SPME1: FN=5, BN=5, SN=0, EN=3, MN=1, DID=V5TK, MOD=CCS;

ADD SPME1: FN=5, BN=7, SN=0, EN=19, MN=1, DID=TUP, MOD=CCS;

ADD SPME1: FN=5, BN=14, SN=0, EN=15, MN=2, DID=TUP, MOD=CCS;

ADD SPME1: FN=5, BN=15, SN=0, EN=1, MN=2, DID=PRA, MOD=CCS;

ADD SPME1: FN=5, BN=15, SN=8, EN=9, MN=2, DID=DT, MOD=CAS;

ADD SPME1: FN=5, BN=19, SN=0, EN=19, MN=2, DID=TUP, MOD=CCS;

IX. Adding SM hardware configuration

ADD SM: MN=31, MTP=B2SM, JF=4, LN1=0, LN2=2, BW=TS8, NO7=FALSE;

ADD CFB: MN=31, F=0, LN=0, PNM="local office", PN=0, ROW=1, COL=0;

ADD USFB: MN=31, F=2, LN=0, PNM="local office", PN=0, ROW=1, COL=0,
N1=0, HW1=0, TSN=2;

ADD USFB: MN=31, F=3, LN=0, PNM="local office", PN=0, ROW=1, COL=0,
N1=1, HW1=2, TSN=2;

ADD USFB: MN=31, F=4, LN=0, PNM="local office", PN=0, ROW=1, COL=0,
N1=2, HW1=4, TSN=2;

/*Intelligent number receiving frame*/

ADD BDIN: MN=31, F=5, LN=0, PNM="local office", PN=0, ROW=1, COL=0,
N1=3, N2=8, N3=9, N4=10, HW1=12;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=0, S=2;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=0, S=3;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=0, S=4;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=0, S=5;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=0, S=6;

4-13
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=0, S=17;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=0, S=18;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=1, S=4;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=1, S=5;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=1, S=6;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=1, S=7;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=1, S=17;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=1, S=18;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=1, S=19;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=1, S=20;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=5, S=14;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=5, S=16;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=5, S=17;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=5, S=18;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=5, S=19;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=5, S=20;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=5, S=21;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=5, S=22;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=5, S=23;

RMV BRD: MN=31, F=2, S=2;

ADD BRD: MN=31, F=2, S=2, BT=DSL;

X. Adding RSM hardware configuration

ADD SM2: MN=101, MTP=B1SM, JF=4, S1=6, EN1=0, S2=7, EN2=0, BW=TS4,
NO7=FALSE;

ADD CFB: MN=101, F=1, LN=0, PNM="remote end", PN=1, ROW=0, COL=0;

ADD DTFB: MN=101, F=5, LN=0, PNM="remote end", PN=1, ROW=0, COL=0,
N1=0, N5=255, HW1=90, HW9=255;

ADD USFB: MN=101, F=6, LN=1, PNM="remote end", PN=1, ROW=0, COL=1,
N1=8, HW1=0, TSN=6;

4-14
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

ADD USFB: MN=101, F=7, LN=1, PNM="remote end", PN=1, ROW=0, COL=1,
N1=9, HW1=2, TSN=6;

ADD USFB: MN=101, F=8, LN=1, PNM="remote end", PN=1, ROW=0, COL=1,
N1=10, HW1=4, TSN=6;

ADD USFB: MN=101, F=9, LN=1, PNM="remote end", PN=1, ROW=0, COL=1,
N1=11, HW1=6, TSN=6;

ADD USFB: MN=101, F=10, LN=1, PNM="remote end", PN=1, ROW=0, COL=1,
N1=16, HW1=8, TSN=6;

ADD USFB: MN=101, F=11, LN=1, PNM="remote end", PN=1, ROW=0, COL=1,
N1=17, HW1=10, TSN=6;

ADD USFB: MN=101, F=12, LN=1, PNM="remote end", PN=1, ROW=0, COL=1,
N1=18, HW1=12, TSN=6;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=1, S=2;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=1, S=3;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=1, S=4;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=1, S=5;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=1, S=6;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=1, S=17;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=1, S=18;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=1, S=21;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=1, S=22;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=2, S=3;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=2, S=17;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=2, S=18;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=2, S=19;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=2, S=20;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=5, S=2;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=5, S=3;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=5, S=4;

RMV BRD: MN=101, F=5, S=5;

4-15
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

ADD BRD: MN=101, F=5, S=2, BT=IDT;

ADD BRD: MN=101, F=5, S=3, BT=IDT;

ADD BRD: MN=101, F=5, S=4, BT=IDT;

ADD BRD: MN=101, F=5, S=5, BT=IDT;

ADD E1CFG: MN1=0, F1=4 S1=6, EN1=0, MN2=101, F2=5, S2=2, EN2=0,
TM=CCS;

ADD E1CFG: MN1=0, F1=4, S1=6, EN1=1, MN2=101, F2=5, S2=2, EN2=1,
TM=CCS;

ADD E1CFG: MN1=0, F1=4, S1=6, EN1=2, MN2=101, F2=5, S2=4, EN2=0,
TM=CCS;

ADD E1CFG: MN1=0, F1=4, S1=6, EN1=3, MN2=101, F2=5, S2=4, EN2=1,
TM=CCS;

ADD E1CFG: MN1=0, F1=4, S1=7, EN1=0, MN2=101, F2=5, S2=3, EN2=0,
TM=CCS;

ADD E1CFG: MN1=0, F1=4, S1=7, EN1=1, MN2=101, F2=5, S2=3, EN2=1,
TM=CCS;

ADD E1CFG: MN1=0, F1=4, S1=7, EN1=2, MN2=101, F2=5, S2=5, EN2=0,
TM=CCS;

ADD E1CFG: MN1=0, F1=4, S1=7, EN1=3, MN2=101, F2=5, S2=5, EN2=1,
TM=CCS;

4.3 Charging Data Configuration

4.3.1 Charging Data

Make the plan for the charging data and relevant data according to the charging
requirements in 4.1 II. Charging data. Table 4-4 gives the discount data, Table 4-5
gives the charging source codes, Table 4-6 gives the charging descriptions, Table
4-7 gives the charging selection code of the prefixes, Table 4-8 describes the
destination code charging, and Table 4-9 describes the called charging.

Table 4-4 Discount

Weekday Date state Discount

Monday Normal 1
Tuesday Normal 1

4-16
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Weekday Date state Discount

Wednesday Normal 1
Thursday Normal 1
Friday Normal 1
Saturday 1 0.85
Sunday 2 0.5

Table 4-5 Allocation of charging source codes

Called charging source

Subscriber/Trunk Charging source code
code
8880000 to 8889999 0 None
No.10 trunk group 100 None
All other trunk groups 255 None

Table 4-6 Charging description

Chargin Charging Meter Charging

Charging description
g No. mode applied tariff
0 Free For calls to the numbers 110, 120
0.11 For calls to local numbers 888000 to
1 Metering Table1
(Dollars) 8889999
For calls of the local prefix 222 to the
2 Metering Table2 0.18
end office
For calls of the local prefixes 333,
3 Metering Table3 0.2
444 to the tandem office
For calls to the 163 to the access
4 Metering Table4 0.02
server through PRA
5 Metering Table1 For calls to 114
10 Free For calls to 112
For toll calls, incoming calls from the
11 Detailed ticket
tandem office
Perform called charging for the
30 Metering Table6 0.02
access server

4-17
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Table 4-7 Charging selection codes of the call prefixes

Call prefix Charging selection code remark

Prefix starting with 110, 120 0

Prefix starting with 888 1

Prefix starting with222 2

Prefix starting with 333, 444 3

163 4

114 5

112 10

0, 00 and prefix starting with 0 11

Table 4-8 Destination code charging

Charging selection Calling charging

Bearer capability Charging
code source code
0 0 All voice services 0
1 0 All voice services 1
1 100 All voice services 11
2 0 All voice services 2
2 100 All voice services 11
3 0 All voice services 3
3 100 All voice services 11
4 0 All voice services 4
4 100 All voice services 11
5 0 All voice services 5
5 100 All voice services 11
10 0 All voice services 10
10 100 All voice services 11
11 0 All voice services 11
11 100 All voice services 11

4-18
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Table 4-9 Called group charging

Called charging source

Bearer capability charging
code
1 All voice services 30

4.3.2 Configuration Commands

I. Modifying weekday categories

MOD WCAT: WD=SUN, DAT=DTYPE2;

MOD WCAT: WD=MON, DAT=NORMAL;

MOD WCAT: WD=TUE, DAT=NORMAL;

MOD WCAT: WD=WED, DAT=NORMAL;

MOD WCAT: WD=THUR, DAT=NORMAL;

MOD WCAT: WD=FRI, DAT=NORMAL;

MOD WCAT: WD=SAT, DAT=DTYPE1;

II. Adding charging cases

ADD CHGANA: CHA=0, PAY=FREE;

ADD CHGANA: CHA=1, PAY=CALLER, CHGT=PLSACC, MID=METER1;

ADD CHGANA: CHA=2, PAY=CALLER, CHGT=PLSACC, MID=METER2;

ADD CHGANA: CHA=3, PAY=CALLER, CHGT=PLSACC, MID=METER3;

ADD CHGANA: CHA=5, PAY=CALLER, CHGT=PLSACC, MID=METER1;

ADD CHGANA: CHA=10, PAY=NOCHG;

ADD CHGANA: CHA=11, CHO=NOCENACC, PAY=CALLER, CHGT=DETAIL,

RAT=7;

III. Modifying charging modes

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=0, DAT=NORMAL, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=100;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=1, DAT=NORMAL, TA1=180, PA1=2, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=100;

4-19
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=2, DAT=NORMAL, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=100;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=3, DAT=NORMAL, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=100;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=5, DAT=NORMAL, TA1=180, PA1=2, TB1=60, PB1=0,

AGIO1=100;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=10, DAT=NORMAL, TA1=60, PA1=0, TB1=60, PB1=0,

AGIO1=100;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=11, DAT=NORMAL, TA1=6, PA1=1, TB1=6, PB1=1,

AGIO1=100;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=0, DAT=DTYPE1, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=85;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=1, DAT=DTYPE1, TA1=180, PA1=2, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=85;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=2, DAT=DTYPE1, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=85;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=3, DAT=DTYPE1, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=85;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=5, DAT=DTYPE1, TA1=180, PA1=2, TB1=60, PB1=0,

AGIO1=85;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=10, DAT=DTYPE1, TA1=60, PA1=0, TB1=60, PB1=0,

AGIO1=85;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=11, DAT=DTYPE1, TA1=6, PA1=1, TB1=6, PB1=1,

AGIO1=85;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=0, DAT=DTYPE2, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=50;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=1, DAT=DTYPE2, TA1=180, PA1=2, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=50;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=2, DAT=DTYPE2, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=50;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=3, DAT=DTYPE2, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=50;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=5, DAT=DTYPE2, TA1=180, PA1=2, TB1=60, PB1=0,

AGIO1=50;

4-20
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=10, DAT=DTYPE2, TA1=60, PA1=0, TB1=60, PB1=0,

AGIO1=50;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=11, DAT=DTYPE2, TA1=6, PA1=1, TB1=6, PB1=1,

AGIO1=50;

IV. Modifying the charging tariff of meters

MOD MTRR: MID=METER1, RAT=11;

MOD MTRR: MID=METER2, RAT=18;

MOD MTRR: MID=METER3, RAT=20;

V. Adding charging case indexes

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=0, RCHS=0, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=0;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=1, RCHS=0, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=1;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=2, RCHS=0, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=2;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=3, RCHS=0, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=3;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=5, RCHS=0, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=5;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=10, RCHS=0, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=10;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=11, RCHS=0, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=11;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=0, RCHS=100, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=11;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=1, RCHS=100, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=11;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=2, RCHS=100, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=11;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=3, RCHS=100, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=11;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=5, RCHS=100, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=11;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=10, RCHS=100, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=11;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=11, RCHS=100, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=11;

4-21
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Note:
z Refer to the PRA configuration data for the relevant data of the charging cases 4 and 30.
z Refer to the PRA configuration data for the relevant charging modification data of the charging
cases 4 and 30.
z Refer to the PRA configuration data for the relevant charging tariff of the meter 4 and meter 6.
z Refer to the PRA configuration data for the relevant chaging index data of the charging cases 4
and 30.
z Refer to the PRA configuration data for the relevant called charging data.
z Refer to the relevant parts in the subscriber data for the charging of the Centrex group.

4.4 Trunk Data Configuration

4.4.1 Trunk Data

The trunk data is configured according to the networking as shown in Figure 4-1,
and the hardware data in Table 4-2 and Table 4-3. Table 4-10 gives the allocation
of the trunk circuits of the ET16 boards in the interface frame 5, the signaling link
allocation is shown as Table 4-11, the office direction, the sub-route, and the link
set allocation are shown as Table 4-12, and the trunk route allocation is shown as
Table 4-13.

Table 4-10 Allocation of the E1s of ET16 boards in the interface frame 5

E1 Number Slot 2 Slot 14 Slot 7(STU) Slot 21(STU)

0 Toll office Toll office Tandem office Tandem office
1 Toll office Toll office Tandem office Tandem office
2 Toll office Toll office Tandem office Tandem office
3 Toll office Toll office Tandem office Tandem office
4 Toll office Toll office Tandem office Tandem office
5 End office End office Tandem office Tandem office
6 End office End office Tandem office Tandem office
7 End office End office Tandem office Tandem office
8 End office End office Tandem office Tandem office
9 End office End office Tandem office Tandem office
10 End office End office Tandem office Tandem office
11 End office End office Tandem office Tandem office

4-22
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

E1 Number Slot 2 Slot 14 Slot 7(STU) Slot 21(STU)

12 End office End office Tandem office Tandem office
13 End office End office Tandem office Tandem office
14 End office End office Tandem office Tandem office
15 Tandem office Tandem office
Tandem office Tandem office
Tandem office Tandem office
Tandem office Tandem office

Table 4-11 Allocation of signaling links

In-card
Slot 10 Slot 13 Slot 20 Slot 21 Slot 22 Slot 23
link No.
Toll Toll
0 V5 V5 PRA PRA
office-1 office-2
Tandem Tandem
1
office-1 office-2
End End
2
office-1 office-2

Table 4-12 Office direction, sub-route, trunk group and link set table

Outgoing
Route
Call Charging trunk Trunk
Office Office Sub Trunk selection
DPC LS source source charging E1
name direction route group source
code code source number
code
code

Local
13EF23
office

Toll office 13EF23 0 0 0/1 0,1/1 0/1 0 255 255 10,4/4

Tandem
13EFAA 1 1 10 10 0/1 0 100 255 40
office
End office 13EFEE 2 2 20 20 0/1 0 255 255 20

4-23
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Note:
The number(s) at the left side of “/” in the table correspond to the number(s) at the right side of “/”.
The sub-route 0 is corresponding to the trunk group 0, 1, and corresponding to the trunk E1 number
10, 4.

Table 4-13 Allocation of trunk routes

Route selection Sub-route

Route number Sub-route Remark
code selection mode
0 0 0,10,1 Sequence Toll office
10 10 10 Sequence Tandem office
20 20 20,10 Sequence End office
30 30 30,31 Sequence Access server

4.4.2 Configuration Commands

I. Adding call resources

ADD CALLSRC: CSC=0, PRDN=3,P=0,RSSC=0,FSC=0,DCF=0;

ADD CALLSRC: CSC=1, CSCNAME="CENTREX";

II. Adding SS7 DSPs

ADD N7DSP: DPX=0, DPN="Toll office", NPC="13EF23";

ADD N7DSP: DPX=1, DPN="Tandem office", NPC="13EFAA", STP=TRUE;

ADD N7DSP: DPX=2, DPN="End office", NPC="13EFEE", LSS=2;

III. Adding SS7 linksets

ADD N7LKS: LS=0, LSN="Toll office", APX=0, LKS=4;

ADD N7LKS: LS=1, LSN="Tandem office", APX=1, LKS=4;

ADD N7LKS: LS=2, LSN="End office", APX=2, LKS=4;

IV. Adding SS7 routes

ADD N7RT: RN="Toll office", LS=0, DPX=0;

4-24
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

ADD N7RT: RN="Tandem office", LS=1, DPX=1;

ADD N7RT: RN="End office", LS=2, DPX=2;

ADD N7RT: RN="Tandem office_End office", LS=1, PR=1, DPX=2;

V. Adding SS7 links

ADD SPMN7LNK: FN=20, BN=10, BSN=0, LKN="Toll office¿1", LIMFN=5, EBN=2,

EN=0, C=16, LS=0, SLC=0;

ADD SPMN7LNK: FN=20, BN=13, BSN=0, LKN="Toll office¿2", LIMFN=5,

EBN=14, EN=0, C=16, LS=0, SLC=1;

ADD SPMN7LNK: FN=20, BN=10, BSN=1, LKN="Tandem office¿1", LIMFN=5,

EBN=7, EN=0, C=16, LS=1, SLC=0;

ADD SPMN7LNK: FN=20, BN=13, BSN=1, LKN="Tandem office¿2", LIMFN=5,

EBN=19, EN=0, C=16, LS=1, SLC=1;

ADD SPMN7LNK: FN=20, BN=10, BSN=2, LKN="End office¿1", LIMFN=5,

EBN=2, EN=5, C=16, LS=2, SLC=0;

ADD SPMN7LNK: FN=20, BN=13, BSN=2, LKN="End office¿2", LIMFN=5,

EBN=14, EN=5, C=16, LS=2, SLC=1;

VI. Adding office directions

ADD OFC: O=0, ON="Toll office", DOT=CMPX, DOL=HIGH, DPC1="13EF23";

ADD OFC: O=1, ON="Tandem office", DOT=CC, DOL=HIGH, DPC1="13EFAA";

ADD OFC: O=2, ON="End office", DOT=CC, DOL=LOW, DPC1="13EFEE";

VII. Adding sub routes

ADD SRT: SRC=0, O=0, SRN="Toll office (No.7)", TSM=CYC;

ADD SRT: SRC=1, O=0, SRN="Toll office (CAS)", TSM=CYC;

ADD SRT: SRC=10, O=1, SRN="Tandem office", TSM=CYC;

ADD SRT: SRC=20, O=2, SRN="End office", TSM=CYC;

VIII. Adding trunk groups

ADD N7TG: TG=0, G=INOUT, SRC=0, TGN="Toll office (No.7)";

ADD N7TG: TG=10, G=INOUT, SRC=10, TGN="Tandem office", RCHS=100,

NICF=FALSE, IPM=TRK;

4-25
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

ADD N7TG: TG=20, G=INOUT, SRC=20, TGN="End office";

ADD N1TG: TG=1, G=OUT, SRC=1, TGN="Toll office (CAS)_out";

ADD N1TG: TG=2, G= IN, SRC=1, TGN="Toll office (CAS)_in";

IX. Adding SS7 trunk circuits

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=0, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=0, SCIC=0,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=1, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=0, SCIC=32,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=2, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=0, SCIC=64,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=3, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=0, SCIC=96,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=4, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=0, SCIC=128,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=0, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=0, SCIC=160,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=1, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=0, SCIC=192,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=2, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=0, SCIC=224,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=3, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=0, SCIC=256,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=4, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=0, SCIC=288,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=05, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=000,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=06, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=032,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=07, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=064,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=08, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=096,

SCF=FALSE;

4-26
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=09, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=128,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=10, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=160,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=11, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=192,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=12, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=224,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=13, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=256,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=2, EN=14, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=288,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=05, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=320,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=06, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=352,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=07, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=384,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=08, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=416,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=09, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=448,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=10, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=480,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=11, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=512,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=12, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=544,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=13, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=576,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=14, EN=14, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=20, SCIC=608,

SCF=FALSE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=00, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0000,

SCF=TRUE;

4-27
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=01, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0032,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=02, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0064,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=03, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0096,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=04, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0128,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=05, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0160,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=06, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0192,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=07, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0224,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=08, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0256,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=09, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0288,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=10, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0320,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=11, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0352,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=12, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0384,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=13, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0416,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=14, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0448,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=15, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0480,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=16, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0512,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=17, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0544,

SCF=TRUE;

4-28
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=18, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0576,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=07, EN=19, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0608,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=00, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0640,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=01, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0672,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=02, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0704,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=03, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0736,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=04, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0768,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=05, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0800,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=06, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0832,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=07, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0864,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=08, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0896,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=09, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0928,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=10, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0960,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=11, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=0992,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=12, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=1024,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=13, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=1056,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=14, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=1088,

SCF=TRUE;

4-29
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=15, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=1120,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=16, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=1152,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=17, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=1184,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=18, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=1216,

SCF=TRUE;

ADD SPMN7TKC: FN=5, BN=19, EN=19, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=10, SCIC=1248,

SCF=TRUE;

/*Add CAS trunk circuit*/

ADD SPMN1TKC: FN=5, BN=3, EN=8, SCN=1, ECN=15, TG=2;

ADD SPMN1TKC: FN=5, BN=3, EN=9, SCN=1, ECN=15, TG=2;

ADD SPMN1TKC: FN=5, BN=15, EN=8, SCN=1, ECN=15, TG=2;

ADD SPMN1TKC: FN=5, BN=15, EN=9, SCN=1, ECN=15, TG=2;

ADD SPMN1TKC: FN=5, BN=3, EN=8, SCN=17, ECN=31, TG=1;

ADD SPMN1TKC: FN=5, BN=3, EN=9, SCN=17, ECN=31, TG=1;

ADD SPMN1TKC: FN=5, BN=15, EN=8, SCN=17, ECN=31, TG=1;

ADD SPMN1TKC: FN=5, BN=15, EN=9, SCN=17, ECN=31, TG=1;

X. Adding routes

ADD RT: R=0, RN="Toll office", SR1=0, SR2=10, SR3=1;

ADD RT: R=10, RN="Tandem office", SR1=10;

ADD RT: R=20, RN="End office", SR1=20, SR2=10;

XI. Adding route analysis

ADD RTANA: RSC=0, RSSC=0, RUT=ALL, ADI=ALL, CLR=ALL, TP=ALL,

TMX=0, R=0, ISUP=NOCHANGE;

ADD RTANA: RSC=10, RSSC=0, RUT=ALL, ADI=ALL, CLR=ALL, TP=ALL,

TMX=0, R=10, ISUP=NOCHANGE;

ADD RTANA: RSC=20, RSSC=0, RUT=ALL, ADI=ALL, CLR=ALL, TP=ALL,

TMX=0, R=20, ISUP=NOCHANGE;

4-30
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

XII. Adding supplementary signaling

ADD AUSSIG: CSC=0, SA6=TRUE, SA6P=3, SRD=TRUE;

ADD AUSSIG: CSC=1, SA6=TRUE, SA6P=3, SRD=TRUE;

Note:
z The supplementary signaling needs to reference the call source data, so place the call source
data in the trunk data.
z Refer to the PRA data configuration for the relevant PRA trunk data.
z Refer to the V5 data configuration for the relevant V5 trunk data.

4.5 Call Prefix Data Configuration

4.5.1 Call Prefix Data

Table 4-14 gives the prefix data.

Table 4-14 Prefix data collection table

Route Length
Call Service Release Charging
arriving of the Meter Remark
prefix attribute mode description
directly number
Toll Caller Detailed
0 National 6¿15
office control ticket
Internatio Toll Caller Detailed
00 6¿18
nal office control ticket
Tandem Called
110 Local 3¿3 Free
office control
Intra-offic Called
112 3¿3 Free
e control
Tandem No party
114 Local 3¿3 2/180+1/60 Meter 1
office control
Tandem Called
119 Local 3¿3 Free
office control
Tandem Called
120 Local 3¿3 Free
office control
Access No party
163 Local 3¿3 1/60+1/60 Meter 4
server control

4-31
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Route Length
Call Service Release Charging
arriving of the Meter Remark
prefix attribute mode description
directly number
Access No party
163 Local 3¿3 1/60+1/60 Meter 6
server control
No party
300 IN SCP 3¿3
control
End No party
222 Local 7¿7 1/60+1/60 Meter 2
office control
Tandem No party
333 Local 7¿7 1/60+1/60 Meter 3
office control
Tandem No party
444 Local 7¿7 1/60+1/60 Meter 3
office control
Intra-offic No party
888 7¿7 2/180+1/60 Meter 1
e control

According to Table 4-13 and Table 4-7, Table 4-15 gives the allocation of the route
selection codes and charging selection codes of the prefixes.

Table 4-15 Prefix planning table

Route Charging
DN set Call prefix selection selection Release mode
code code
0 0 0 11 Caller control
0 00 0 11 Caller control
0 110 10 0 Called control
0 112 10 10 Called control
0 114 10 5 No party control
0 119 10 0 Called control
0 120 10 0 Called control
0 163 30 4 No party control
0 300 65535 No party control
0 222 20 2 No party control
0 333 10 3 No party control
0 444 10 3 No party control
0 888 65535 1 No party control

4-32
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

4.5.2 Configuration Commands

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'0, CSA=NTT, RSC=0, MINL=6, MAXL=15, CHSC=11,

RCM=CLRC;

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'00, CSA=ITT, RSC=0, MINL=6, MAXL=18, CHSC=11,

RCM=CLRC;

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'110, CSA=LC, RSC=10, MINL=3, MAXL=3, CHSC=0,

RCM=CLDC, ECOS=TRUE;

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'112, CSA=LC, RSC=10, MINL=3, MAXL=3, CHSC=0;

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'114, CSA=LC, RSC=10, MINL=3, MAXL=3, CHSC=5;

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'119, CSA=LC, RSC=10, MINL=3, MAXL=3, CHSC=0,

RCM=CLDC;

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'120, CSA=LC, RSC=10, MINL=3, MAXL=3, CHSC=0,

RCM=CLDC;

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'222, CSA=LC, RSC=20, MINL=7, MAXL=7, CHSC=2;

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'333, CSA=LC, RSC=10, MINL=7, MAXL=7, CHSC=3;

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'444, CSA=LC, RSC=10, MINL=7, MAXL=7, CHSC=3;

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'888, CSA=LCO, MINL=7, MAXL=7, CHSC=1;

Note:
Refer to the PRA data configuration and IN service configuration for the data of the call prefixes
such as 163 and 300.

4.6 Subscriber Data Configuration

4.6.1 Subscriber Data

Table 4-16 shows the allocation of subscriber numbers.

4-33
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Table 4-16 Allocation of subscriber numbers

Module Equipment
Telephone number Remark
number number
31 0 ¿ 999 8880000 ¿ 8880999 Ordinary subscribers
8880000 ¿ 8880499
(extension numbers: 8000 ¿ Centrex subscribers
8499)
Allocate
1 8881000¿ 8881999 V5 subscribers
automatically
8881000 ¿ 8880299
(extension numbers: 8500 ¿ Centrex subscribers
8799)
101 0 ¿ 1799 8882000 ¿ 8883799 Ordinary subscribers

8882000 ¿ 8882009 PBX subscribers

4.6.2 Configuration Commands

I. Adding a number segment

ADD DNSEG: P=0, SDN=K'8880000, EDN=K'8889999, IDX=1000;

II. Adding various kinds of subscribers

/*ordinary subscriber*/

ADB ST: SDN=K'8880016, EDN=K'8880599, MN=31, DS=16, RCHS=0;

ADB ST: SDN=K'8880600, EDN=K'8880899, MN=31, DS=600, RCHS=0;

ADB ST: SDN=K'8882000, EDN=K'8882599, MN=101, DS=0, RCHS=0;

ADB ST: SDN=K'8882600, EDN=K'8883199, MN=101, DS=600, RCHS=0;

ADB ST: SDN=K'8883200, EDN=K'8883799, MN=101, DS=1200, RCHS=0;

III. Adding Centrex group data

/*add Centrex group/

ADD CXGRP: CGN="hotel", CXG=0, OGP=K'0, UCPC=1000, IGRM=HKR;

ADD CHGCX: CXG=0, CHA=10;

ADD CXPFX: CXG=0, PFX=K'8, MINL=4, MAXL=4;

4-34
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

ADD OCXPFX: CXG=0, OGP=K'7;

/*add Centrex console*/

ADD CXCON: D=K'8888888, MN=31, DS=0, CXG=0, CXD=K'8888, ACC=K'9,

RCHS=0 , CSC=1;

*/add Centrex in-group subscribers*/

ADB DSL: SDN=K'8880002, EDN=K'8880015, MN=31, DS=2, RCHS=0, CSC=1,

CGF=TRUE, CXG=0, CXD=K'8002;

MOB ST: SDN=K'8880016, EDN=K'8880499, RCHS=0, CSC=1, CGF=TRUE,

CXG=0, CXD=K'8016;

IV. Adding PBX data

/*Add PBX indicating number*/

ADD ST: D=K'8887777, MN=101, DS=1800, RCHS=0;

/*Add PBX group*/

ADD PBX: GDN=K'8887777;

/*Add non-indicating numbers*/

MOB ST: SDN=K'8882000, EDN=K'8882010, AUT=PBXD, GDN=K'8887777;

Note:
z Refer to the V5 data configuration for the V5 subscriber data.
z Refer to Table 4-5 for the charging source codes.

4.7 V5 Data Configuration

4.7.1 V5 Data

Table 4-17 shows the layout of V5 trunk E1s and Table 4-18 shows the
V5-interface planning.

Table 4-17 Layout of V5 trunk E1s

Trunk group number Layout of the trunk E1s

150 Slot 4 frame 5:E0¿E3 Slot 6 frame 5:E0¿E3

4-35
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Table 4-18 V5 interface planning

Circuit
Logical Circuit HDLC
number
V5 V5 trunk C-channe number number of
Module location Primar
interface group l ID of the of the the
No. of y link
ID number primary secondar secondary
primary
link y link link
link
The time The The time
slot 16 of first link slot 16 of The first
the E0 from the E0 link from
1 0 150 0
from Slot Slot 21, from Slot Slot 20,
4, Frame Fame 5, Frame Frame 20
5 20 5

4.7.2 Configuration Commands

I. Adding a V5 trunk group

ADD V5TG: TG=150, TGN="olt";

II. Adding V5 trunk circuits

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=5, BN=4, EN=0, TG=150, V5PCM=0;

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=5, BN=4, EN=1, TG=150, V5PCM=1;

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=5, BN=4, EN=2, TG=150, V5PCM=4;

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=5, BN=4, EN=3, TG=150, V5PCM=5;

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=5, BN=5, EN=0, TG=150, V5PCM=2;

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=5, BN=5, EN=1, TG=150, V5PCM=3;

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=5, BN=5, EN=2, TG=150, V5PCM=6;

ADD SPMV5TKC: FN=5, BN=5, EN=3, TG=150, V5PCM=7;

III. Adding a V5-interface

ADD SPMV5IFC: TKG=150, IID=0, MLIMF=5, MES=4, MEN=0, MCN=16,

MSPMF=20, MCPCS=21, MHC=0, MID=0, FLIMF=5, FES=5, FEN=0, FCN=16,
FSPMF=20, FCPCS=20, FHC=0;

IV. Adding V5 subscribers

/*V5 ordinary subscriber/

4-37
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

ADB V5ST: SDN=K'8881000, EDN=K'8881299, MN=1, IID=0, L3ADR=100,

RCHS=0;

ADB V5ST: SDN=K'8881300, EDN=K'8881599, MN=1, IID=0, L3ADR=400,

RCHS=0;

ADB V5ST: SDN=K'8881600, EDN=K'8881899, MN=1, IID=0, L3ADR=700,

RCHS=0;

ADB V5ST: SDN=K'8881900, EDN=K'8881999, MN=1, IID=0, L3ADR=1000,

RCHS=0;

*/Centrex intra-group V5 subscriber/

MOB V5ST: SDN=K'8881000, EDN=K'8881299, MN=1, CGF=TRUE, CXG=0,

CXD=K'8500;

Note:
Refer to the above relevant data for the number segment data, call source data, call prefix data
involved in the V5 data.

4.8 PRA Data Configuration

4.8.1 PRA Data

Table 4-19 gives the PRA data planning.

Table 4-19 Allocation of the PRA trunk data

Module Route Sub-rout Trunk

Trunk circuit Signaling link
No. No. e group
E0 of Slot 3 of No.0 link of the CPC board
1,2 30 31 30
Interface frame 5 of Slot 22 of SPM frame 22

E1 of Slot 3 of No.1 link of the CPC board

31
Interface frame 5 of Slot 22 of SPM frame 22

E0 of Slot 15 of No.0 link of the CPC board

32
Interface frame 5 of Slot 23 of SPM frame 20.

E1 of Slot 15 of No.1 link of the CPC board

33
Interface frame 5 of Slot 23 of SPM frame 20

4-38
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

4.8.2 Configuration Commands

I. Adding charging cases

ADD CHGANA: CHA=4, PAY=CALLER, CHGT=PLSACC, MID=METER4;

ADD CHGANA: CHA=30, PAY=CALLED, CHGT=PLSACC, MID=METER6;

II. Modifying charging modes

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=4, DAT=NORMAL, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=100;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=30, DAT=NORMAL, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=100;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=4, DAT=DTYPE1, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=85;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=30, DAT=DTYPE1, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=85;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=4, DAT=DTYPE2, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=50;

MOD CHGMODE: CHA=30, DAT=DTYPE2, TA1=60, PA1=1, TB1=60, PB1=1,

AGIO1=50;

III. Modifying the charging tariff of the meters

MOD MTRR: MID=METER4, RAT=2;

MOD MTRR: MID=METER6, RAT=2;

IV. Adding charging case indexes

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=4, RCHS=0, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=4;

ADD CHGIDX: CHSC=4, RCHS=100, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=11;

V. Adding the called party charging

ADD CHGCLD: DCHS=1, LOAD=ALLSVR, CHA=30;

VI. Adding an office direction

ADD OFC: O=3, ON="access server", DOT=CC, DOL=LOW;

4-39
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

VII. Adding sub routes

ADD SRT: SRC=30, O=3, SRN=" access server ", TSM=CYC;

ADD SRT: SRC=31, O=3, SRN=" access server ", TSM=CYC;

VIII. Adding a route

ADD RT: R=30, RN=" access server ", SR1=30, SR2=31, SRST=PERC, PSR1=50,
PSR2=50;

IX. Adding route analysis

ADD RTANA: RSC=30, RSSC=0, RUT=ALL, ADI=ALL, CLR=ALL, TP=ALL,

TMX=0, R=30, ISUP=NOCHANGE;

X. Adding call prefixes

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'163, CSA=LC, RSC=30, MINL=3, MAXL=3, CHSC=4;

ADD CNACLD: PFX=K'165, CSA=LC, RSC=30, MINL=3, MAXL=3, CHSC=4;

XI. Adding a number segment

ADD DNSEG: P=0, SDN=K'16300, EDN=K'16302;

XII. Adding an ISDN index

ADD ISDNDAT: ISDNX=1, BCHN=30;

XIII. Adding PRA subscriber data

ADD PRA: D=K'16301, RTSL=30, ISDNX=1, MN=1, RCHS=0, DCHS=1,

NS=DDI-1&CLIP-1;

ADD PRA: D=K'16302, RTSL=30, ISDNX=1, MN=2, RCHS=0, DCHS=1,

NS=DDI-1&CLIP-1;

XIV. Adding PRA links

ADD SPMPRALNK: FN=20, BN=23, BSN=0, LIMFN=5, EBN=3, EN=0, C=16;

ADD SPMPRALNK: FN=20, BN=23, BSN=1, LIMFN=5, EBN=3, EN=1, C=16;

ADD SPMPRALNK: FN=20, BN=22, BSN=0, LIMFN=5, EBN=15, EN=0, C=16;

ADD SPMPRALNK: FN=20, BN=22, BSN=1, LIMFN=5, EBN=15, EN=1, C=16;

4-40
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

XV. Adding PRA trunk groups

ADD SPMPRATG: TG=30, SRC=30, F=20, BN=23, BSN=0, CDFT=K'16301,

TGN=" access server _1";

ADD SPMPRATG: TG=31, SRC=30, F=20, BN=23, BSN=1, CDFT=K'16301,

TGN=" access server _2";

ADD SPMPRATG: TG=32, SRC=31, F=20, BN=22, BSN=0, CDFT=K'16302,

TGN=" access server _3";

ADD SPMPRATG: TG=33, SRC=31, F=20, BN=22, BSN=1, CDFT=K'16302,

TGN=" access server _4";

XVI. Adding PRA trunk circuits

ADD SPMPRATKC: FN=5, BN=3, EN=0, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=30;

ADD SPMPRATKC: FN=5, BN=3, EN=1, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=31;

ADD SPMPRATKC: FN=5, BN=15, EN=0, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=32;

ADD SPMPRATKC: FN=5, BN=15, EN=1, SCN=0, ECN=31, TG=33;

Note:
z Refer to Table 4-4 to Table 4-9 for the data involved in the PRA charging, and refer to the
charging data for the modification of the weekday categories.
z Refer to Table 4-10 to Table 4-13 for the data involved in the PRA route and trunk.
z Refer to the prefix data and trunk data for the number segment data, call prefix data and call
source data involved in the PRA data configuration.

4.9 IN Data Configuration

4.9.1 IN Service Data

Table 4-20 shows the configuration of the IN service, Table 4-21 gives the basic IN
charging data, and Table 4-22 gives the IP address information.

Table 4-20 Configuration of the IN service

Service name Access code Service key Database

300 service 300 300 810

4-41
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

Table 4-21 Basic IN charging data

TB First
Metering
Charging PA charging independent metering Discount
interval(min
category tariff charging interval index
ute)
tariff (minute)
2 145 50 3 1 none

Table 4-22 IP address information

IP IP SCP IP SCP IP Port

Grou Sub-net Gatewa
addres addres address address numbe
p No. mask y
s1 s2 1 2 r

10.11.2 10.11.2 10.11.11 255.255.2 10.11.0.

MEM 0 5600
5.34 5.36 .1 55.0 0

4.9.2 Configuration Commands

I. Adding a call prefix

ADD CNACLD: P=0, PFX=K'300, CSTP=IN, CSA=INSVR, MINL=3, MAXL=3,

CHSC=65535;

II. Adding an access code

ADD ACCODE: CODE=K'300, LEN=3, POS=255, DBLEN=255;

III. Adding TDP configuration

ADD TDPCFG: DPNO=3, DPCNO=ACODE, CODE=K'300, SKEY=300;

IV. Adding SCP physical address description

ADD SCPADR: SCP=0, DPCF=TRUE, SSNF=TRUE, GT=NO, RT=DPC,

DPC="13EFCC", NID=NAT, SSN=INAP;

V. Adding SSP physical address cescription

ADD SSPADR: SCP=0, DPCF=TRUE, SSNF=TRUE, GT=NO, RT=DPC,

DPC="13EFCC", NID=NAT, SSN=INAP;

VI. Adding SCP configuration

ADD SCPCFG: SKEY=300, DB=65535, SCP0=YES;

4-42
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 4 Data Configuration Examples

VII. Adding SSP speicalized resource function

ADD SSPSRC: SKEY=300, MN=255;

VIII. Adding resource searching sequence

ADD SRCSRH: MDU=101, SRC=BRD, SRH=FIX, MDU1=31;

ADD SRCSRH: MDU=101, SRC=DIN, SRH=FIX, MDU1=31;

ADD SRCSRH: MDU=101, SRC=IDLE, SRH=FIX, MDU1=31;

IX. Adding a charging case

ADD CHGCLS: CLS=2, RAT=145, PRAT=50, TA=180, PA=1, TB=60, PB=1, IDX
=65535;

Note:
z The RSM (101) is not configured with the special voice resource. Therefore, in the IN service
processing, the relevant voice resources are borrowed from the SM 31.
z The RSM (101) is not configured with an MEM board, but the relevant configuration is
indispensable.
z Refer to Table 4-14 and Table 4-15 for the call prefix data.

4-43
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

5.1 Configuration Procedures

Configuration management of BTU board includes network element (NE) management,

equipment management, downstream equipment registration management, network
management system (NMS) parameter configuration management, service data
configuration management, loading and backup management, performance
management and alarm management. All configurations except loading and backup
management, performance management and alarm management are mandatory to the
BTU board. In practice, proceed the configurations in the sequence shown in Figure
5-1.

Start

NE management

Equipment management

Downstream equipment registration management

NMS parameter configuration management

Service data configuration management

Saving and backing up data

End

Figure 5-1 Procedures for BTU configuration

Table 5-1 shows the configuration items and descriptions.

5-1
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

Table 5-1 Descriptions for BTU configuration

Configuration/Operation type Configurations Remarks

NE management NE configuration Mandatory
Clock source Optional
SDH configuration
Mandatory
Equipment management parameter

Other operations such as

Optional
board reboot and querying
Downstream equipment
Downstream equipment registration Mandatory
registration table of BTU
management
Route table of BTU Optional
NMS Configuration of BTU Mandatory
NMS parameter configuration
management Table for authorized NMS of
Optional
BTU
PVC connection Mandatory
Downstream unicast
Service data configuration management Optional
connection of BTU
FPGA configuration Optional
Saving and backup of data Saving and backing up data Optional

5.1.1 NE Management

NE is a logical concept, corresponding to a device in the network comparatively

independent in hardware and functions. A BTU is an NE. Therefore, management and
maintenance of the BTU is to operate an NE.

BTU configuration starts from that of an NE.

1) Related commands
Command Command function
ADD NE: Add NE configuration
MOD NE Modify NE configuration
RMV NE Remove NE configuration
LST NE Query NE configuration

2) Parameter descriptions
[no.]

5-2
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

It is the NE number of the BTU. The system identifies a BTU by its NE number. One NE
number corresponds to one BTU. When an NE is added, the system will allocate an NE
number automatically by default, so this parameter does not need to be entered.

[type]

It is the NE type. For BTU boards, it is “BTU”.

[ip address]

It is the IP address. For BTU boards, it is IP address of the network port connecting with
the NMS terminal. It is represented with dotted decimal notation “XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX”,
such as 172.20.20.1, being mandatory.

[management port]

It is the number of the UDP port by which NMS manages the corresponding NE by
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)The default value is 161.

[read-only community], [read-write community]

They correspond respectively to read-only and read-write community names of NMS

agents by SNMP. The NMS identifies its agent subsystem by this name, judges on its
validity and decides accordingly whether to accept the packets from this community.
Normally these two parameters adopt the default values.

[timeout], [retry times]

They are respectively timeout duration and retry times that an NMS operates on a BTU.
The timeout duration is 4 seconds by default and the retry times is 4 by default.

Caution:

z NE configurations, such as IP address, must be consistent with the actual values.

z The NE numbers cannot be duplicated.
z On addition of an NE, the NE number entered cannot be the same as any existing one. Use the
command LST NE (by IP address) to query all NEs already configured.

5.1.2 Equipment management

The management of a BTU involves a lot of operations, including configuration

management of the clock source and SDH, board state, version number, CPU usage
querying, and board reboot.

5-3
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

I. Management of BTU Clock Source

The current clock reference source can be configured according to specific

requirements. A BTU has two clock reference sources: line clock and backplane clock.
1) Related commands
Command Command function
SET BTUCLK Set BTU clock source
DSP BTUCLK Query BTU clock source

2) Parameter descriptions
[ne number]

It is the NE number of the BTU.

[clock source]

It is the clock reference source against which the BTU keeps synchronized.

“Circuit clock” means the BTU obtains clock signal from SDH line.

“Motherboard clock” means the BTU takes the clock signal from the backplane of the
LIM frame as reference source.

By default, the value is “circuit clock”,

II. Management of SDH Parameters

A BTU accommodates a 155-Mbit/s SDH line interface, which is equivalent to an SDH

terminal multiplexer (TM).
1) Related commands
Command Command function
SET BTUSDH Set SDH configuration parameters
DSP BTUSDH Display SDH configuration parameters

2) Parameter descriptions
[ne number]

It is the NE number of the BTU.

[setting option]

There are multiple setting options for SDH transmission parameters, which are
explained in the following.

5-4
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

z Send regenerator section trace byte J0

This byte is sent repeatedly for the receiving terminal to confirm continuous connection
with the specified sending terminal. Generally it is required that values of J0 at sending
and receiving terminals of SDH equipment are identical, so that faults can be detected
at the earliest possible time and the time to recovery can be reduced.

J0 may be in one- or 16-byte mode, corresponding to a character string of no more than

16 characters.
z Send higher order path trace byte J1
The function of this byte is similar to that of J0. It is also sent repeatedly for the
receiving terminal to confirm continuous connection with the specified sending terminal.
It is also required that values of J1 at sending and receiving terminals are identical.

J1 may be in 16- or 64-byte mode, corresponding to a character string of no more than

16 or 64 characters.
z Send lower-order path trace byte J2
J2 has the function similar to J0 and J1. It sends repeatedly the lower order path access
point identifier which is negotiated by sending and receiving terminals, in order for the
receiving terminal to confirm continuous connection with the specified sending
terminal.

The 155-Mbit/s STM-1 signal from the BTU is transmitted through 63 VC12 channels,
each of which corresponds to one J2 that has 1-16 characters.
z end higher order path signal label byte c2
C2 refers to the multiplexing structure of VC frame and information of the net load, such
as whether the channel is loaded, the loaded service type and the mapping mode. On
configuration of Huawei equipment, C2 should be set to 02H if 2-Mbit/s signals are
multiplexed.
z Send lower order path V5 overhead byte
V5 byte is for the channel state and the signal label, having functions of bit error
detection, signal label, and VC12 channel state representation.

Every V5 byte of 63 VC12 channels ranges from 0–255.

z Synchronous status byte S1
Bits 5–8 of the synchronous status byte S1 represent different clock qualities
prescribed in ITU-T Recommendations. The SDH equipment judges the quality of the
received clock signal in light of this parameter and decides hereby whether to switch
the clock source, that is, to switch the clock source to one of a higher quality.

The lower value of S1 (bits 5–8) indicates higher quality of the clock.
z Channel multiplex mode

5-5
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

There are two channel multiplex modes supported: HW (of Huawei) and LUC (of
Lucent). In practice, the modes of sending and receiving equipment should keep
consistent. The default value is HW (of Huawei).

Note:
z You can use the command DSP BTUSDH to query information of sent and receivable bytes configured
by the command SET BTUSDH.
z You can use the command DSP BTUSDH to display information of received J0, J1 and J2 bytes,
compare with the receivable ones, and in this way monitor the status of SDH transmission equipment.
z For more detailed information about meanings of these bytes and parameters, refer to books on SDH
principles.

III. Operations on BTU

The system provides the reboot operation, so as to meet the need to reboot the BTU in
special conditions. In addition, you can query information of the BTU, including the
board status, version number, and CPU usage.
1) Related commands
Command Command function
RST BTU Reboot BTU
DSP BTU Display BTU information
DSP BTUVER Query BTU version information
DSP BTUCPUR Query CPU usage of BTU

2) Parameter descriptions
[NE number]

It is the NE number of the BTU.

5-6
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

Caution:

z Board reboot will result in loss of the configuration data in the board memory. Therefore, save or back
up the data before reboot. Refer to “Loading and Backing Up Data” for details.
z You can get information about the current work load of the BTU by querying CPU usage. The value
output on the command DSP BTUCPUR is the CPU usage.
z You can use the command DSP BTU to display the frame number, slot number and detailed
configurations of the hardware, including sizes of the memory and the Flash memory, in-position flag
of pinch board, interface type, and interface state.

5.1.3 Downstream Equipment Registration

I. Downstream Equipment Registration

You can manage downstream BSL equipment of the BTU through the inband NMS
channel, with the inband NMS protocol being TELNET. To realize inband management
on BSL, the related basic parameters of downstream BSL equipment have to be
registered on the BTU. These parameters include the connection port and the IP
address.
1) Related commands
Command Command function
ADD BTUDNDEV Add a registration record of downstream equipment
DSP BTUDNDEV Display registered records of downstream equipment
RMV BTUDNDEV Delete a registration record of downstream equipment

2) Parameter descriptions
[NE number]

It is the NE number of the BTU. The system identifies a BTU by its NE number. One NE
number corresponds to one BTU.

[NM port]

It is the number of the E1 port which the PVC channel of downstream equipment of the
inband NMS is in, being one of the 63 E1 numbers of the 155-Mbit/s SDH interface.

[Device type]

It is the downstream equipment type which can be managed by the inband NMS, being
BSL or MA5105.

5-7
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

[BtuE1 port of Port1], [BtuE1 port of Port2], [BtuE1 port of Port3], [BtuE1 port of Port4]

Each downstream BSL board accommodates four E1 ports (ports 1-4), which connect
respectively with four of the 63 E1 ports on BTU. In commands, these four parameters
represent respectively connections of upstream E1 ports of BSL and E1 ports of BTU.
They range 0–63, among which "0” indicates the port is not in use.

[Device IP]

It is IP address of downstream BSL or MA5105 which is managed by the inband NMS.

It is represented with dotted decimal notation “XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX”, such as
172.50.1.1.

Caution:

z The port which the NMS is in must be among the four E1 ports through which downstream equipment
is connected with BTU, that is, the value of [NM port] must be one of [BtuE1 port of Port1], [BtuE1 port
of Port2], [BtuE1 port of Port3] and [BtuE1 port of Port4] (except when the port number is set to “0”). IP
address of downstream equipment must be consistent with that of ATM network port actually
configured to the downstream equipment; otherwise, the downstream equipment cannot be managed
by the inband NMS.
z The IP address of the downstream equipment must be in the same network segment as that of the
ATM network port of the BTU. You can get information about the IP configurations of the ATM network
port on the BTU using the command DSP BTUNMSINFO. Refer to “NMS Parameters Configuration”
for more information.
z IP address of downstream equipment cannot be configured to IP address or broadcast address of the
network segment.
z To manage downstream equipment by the inband NMS, you have to configure the downstream inband
NMS PVC of the BTU. Refer to “NMS Parameters Configuration” for more information.

II. Route Configuration

When the IP address of the BTU management terminal is not in the same network
segment as that of the NMS interface, the IP packets have to be forwarded by a router
so as to be transmitted correctly. In such case, the BTU selects a static route or the
default route in its route table.

If IP packets cannot be transferred to the network management computer of the

destination IP address through the default gateway (that is, the default route)
configured to the BTU, the static route table of the BTU has to be configured.
1) Related commands

5-8
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

Command Command function

ADD BTUROUTE Add a route to BTU
DSP BTUROUTE Display the BTU route table
RMV BTUROUTE Delete a route of BTU

2) Parameter descriptions
[NE number]

It is the NE number of the BTU.

[Index]

It is the route index of the BTU (an NE).The added route is numbered in the BTU (an
NE) by the index. The numbers cannot be duplicated.

[Destination IP]

It is the destination IP address of an IP packet, referring here to the destination IP

address for router forwarding. It is represented with dotted decimal notation, such as
10.11.17.51.

[Destination IP mask]

In coordination with the destination address, it identifies the address of the network
segment which the destination host or router is in. It is represented with dotted decimal
notation, comprising certain numbers of continuous “1” and “0”, such as 255.255.0.0.

[Gateway IP]

It is the next hop IP address, that is, IP address of the next router which IP packets from
BTU will pass through. It is represented in dotted decimal notation, such as
192.168.20.1.

Note:
z A BTU board can be configured with 63 routes in total.
z IP packets which the BTU sends to NMS may come from downstream BSL equipment or itself.

5-9
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

5.1.4 NMS Parameters Configuration

I. Configuration of NMS

Detailed NMS information of BTU can be configured. These configurations include the
following contents:
z IP addresses and masks of 10-Mbit/s network port, VLAN network port, and ATM
network port;
z IP addresses of the default gateway, default NMS and TFTP server;
z Inband NMS parameters and downstream PVC parameters of inband NMS ;
z NMS channel.
1) Related commands
Command Command function
SET BTUNMSCFG Make NMS configurations of BTU
DSP BTUNMSINFO Display NMS configurations of BTU
DSP BTUDNDEVPVC Display PVC configurations of BTU downstream equipment

2) Parameter descriptions
[NE number]

It is the NE number of the BTU.

[Parameter type]

There are nine types for choice, which correspond to different detailed parameters. See
the following explanations.
z 10-Mbit/s network port setting
The 10-Mbit/s Ethernet interface of BTU is the outband interface through which BTU
and downstream BSL are managed. Its meaning is identical with that of 10-Mbit/s
Ethernet interface in system startup parameters. The IP address and its corresponding
mask are represented with dotted decimal notation, and cannot be null.
z VLAN network port setting
The VLAN network port is for VLAN connection with upstream BAS equipment and
inband management. Its configurations must keep consistent with those of BAS
equipment. The IP address and its mask are represented with dotted decimal notation,
and cannot be null.
z ATM network port setting
A BTU accommodates an ATM network port for downstream equipment management.
This port forwards the packets from downstream equipment by the IP address and its
mask, which are represented with dotted decimal notation and cannot be null.

5-10
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

z Default gateway IP
The default gateway is the default route in case of no matching route. If the BTU cannot
find a route to the destination IP address, it hands over the IP packets to the default
gateway for forwarding. The meaning of the default gateway IP here is identical with
that of IP parameters of the default gateway in system startup parameters. It is
represented with dotted decimal notation.
z Default NMS IP
It refers to the IP address of the host which is permitted to manage the BTU by SNMP.
Its meaning is identical with that of IP parameters of the NMS in system startup
parameters. It is represented with dotted decimal notation.
z TFTP server IP
z IP address of TFTP server is that of the host by which BTU performs loading and
backing up. It may be outband IP address (connecting to 10-Mbit/s network port),
or inband IP address (connecting to VLAN network port).It is represented with
dotted decimal notation.
z Inband management parameter
[Downstream management channel protocol]

Inband management of the BTU on downstream BSL equipment supports two

protocols: IPoA and 1438B. Although RF1483B and IPOA are available for choice, you
have to keep this parameter consistent with the inband NMS mode of downstream BSL
equipment.

[Inband management VLAN value]

For inband management on BTU through inband management channel (VLAN for NMS
channel), inband management VLAN needs to be set with a specified value, which
must be identical with that of upstream BAS equipment.[Inband management MII port
number]

For inband management on the BTU through the inband management channel, the MII
port (MII interface is the bus interface between MAC layer of the 100-Mbit/s FE
interface and the physical layer) of inband management also needs to be specified.
The specified port must keep consistent with that of the inband management channel
configured to the upstream BAS equipment. There are two choices for MII ports:
PORT0 (port 0) and PORT1 (port 1), respectively corresponding to the two upstream
FE interfaces on the BTU.
z Downstream inband PVC setting
For this parameter, there are three choices: E1 port index, inner management channel
VPI, and inner management channel. However, you have to keep its value consistent
with that of inband NMS parameter of downstream BSL equipment.
z NMS channel

5-11
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

For this parameter, there are two choices: Ethernet and VLAN. “Ethernet” refers to the
outband NMS channel of 10-Mbit/s Ethernet interface, while “VLAN” refers to the
inband NMS channel of VLAN. Its meaning is identical with that of NMS channel in
system startup parameters. “Ethernet” corresponds to NMS channel 0 in system
startup parameters, while “VLAN” to 1.

Caution:

z Most NMS parameters can be configured at startup parameters configuration of BTU. Refer to chapter
6 “Configuration of BTU Startup Parameters” in C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Installation
Manual Volume 2
z If IP address of the network port (10-Mbit/s network port for example) connecting to the NMS computer
is modified, that of NE must be modified accordingly with the command MOD NE; otherwise,
communication between management program and BTU will be interrupted.
z To validate modification of NMS parameters, save data into the Flash memory and then reboot the
board.
z IP parameters of 10-Mbit/s network port, VLAN port and ATM port cannot be configured to the same
network segment.
z If downstream equipment is registered, ATM network segment of BTU cannot be modified. In such
case, records of downstream equipment must be deleted first.
z If routes are configured for 10-Mbit/s network port, VLAN port and ATM network port, delete the
configurations before modifying IP parameters of these ports.
z IP address of TFTP server is used for loading and backing up data. As to inband loading, the NMS
channel must be configured to inband (VLAN) mode.
z The command DSP BTUDNDEVPVC can be used to display PVC configurations for inband
management of downstream equipment, such as E1 port number, and VPI/VCI.

II. Configuration of the Table for Authorized NMS

The system supports a network security mechanism, with which the source IP address
of IP packets will be analyzed on packet arrival. If the address is beyond the range for
acceptance, the packet will be regarded as illegal and then be discarded. With the table
for authorized NMS configured, the NMS server will go through an authentication
procedure, which keeps illegal NMSs away. To realize network management of multiple
hosts, add more NMS tables. In such case, the system will add a new NMS list. Only
the hosts existing in the table or having the same settings as the default NMS can get
access.
1) Related commands

5-12
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

Command Command function

ADD BTUNMS Add an NMS that is authorized to access the BTU
DSP BTUNMS Display the NMSs that are authorized to access the BTU
RMV BTUNMS Delete an NMS that is authorized to access the BTU

2) Parameter descriptions
[NE number]

It is the NE number of the BTU.

[NMS index]

Each authorized NMS has its own index. The NMSs are numbered in the same board
by indices.

[Enabled NMS IP]

It is IP address of the authorized NMS host, represented with dotted decimal notation.

[NMS name]

It is the NMS host name, being optional.

5.1.5 Service Data Configuration

The BTU pools broadband services of downstream BSL equipment and connects
ADSL subscribers to IP network (through MA5200), so its service connections must be
configured.

The configurations mainly include service PVC connection establishment, downstream

unicast connection management, service traffic parameter control. In addition, service
processing mode of FPGA chip can be configured.

I. PVC Connection Management

The BTU connects to BSL through PVC, and to MA5200 through VLAN. The
connection management module in BTU software is responsible for establishment of
one-to-one relationship between PVC and VLAN. With this, various service channels
come into being. The system supports two PVC connection protocols: IPoA and 1483B.

PVC connection management facilitates precise control over PVC service channel
parameters.
1) Related commands

5-13
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

Command Command function

ADD BTUPVCLNK Add PVC connection table to BTU
DSP BTUPVCLNK Display PVC connection table of BTU
RMV BTUPVCLNK Delete PVC connection table of BTU
MOD BTUPVCCAR Modify traffic control parameters of PVC connection

2) Parameter descriptions
[NE number]

It is the NE number of the BTU.

[Connection index]

It is the index number of the PVC connection, numbered in a certain NE. The numbers
cannot be duplicated.

[Port]

It is the number of the E1 port which the PVC connection is in. A BTU has 63 E1 ports in
total.

[VPI], [VCI]

Each PVC is identified with two parameters: VPI and VCI. The values of VPI and VCI
can be duplicated in different E1 ports, but not in the same E1 port. Their values should
be configured by negotiation with downstream BSL equipment and kept consistent for a
certain E1 port.VPI ranges 0–15; VCI ranges 32–95.

[VLANID]

It is the VLAN ID of specified PVC. For IPoA, each PVC has a unique VLAN ID; for
1483B, multiple PVCs can share one VLAN ID.

The value of VALN ID should keep consistent with that of upstream BAS equipment.

[MII port]

A BTU accommodates two 100-Mbit/s Ethernet MII ports. If the value of a VLAN ID is
set, the corresponding MII port should also be set. “PORTA” corresponds to the first FE
interface; “PORTB” corresponds to the second.

[PVC type]

It is the protocol type of the PVC connection. The two choices of IPoA and 1483B
correspond to IPoA and 1483B protocols respectively. This value should keep
consistent with that of RTU equipment.

5-14
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

With 1483B protocol, one PVC corresponds to one VLAN ID. With IPoA protocol, IPoA
source IP address must also be specified so as for the system to analyze service data
IP packets on PVC connection. If the source IP address is not the specified IPoA source
IP address, the IP packet will be regarded as illegal and then discarded.

[IPoA source IP]

With IPoA, the IPoA source IP address, which is IP address of downstream equipment
in PVC connection, should be specified. It is represented with dotted decimal notation
and cannot remain null. The specific configurations are as follows:
z If this parameter is configured to a specific address, for instance, that of RTU, the
system will analyze the IP packets on PVC connection. Once source IP address of
a packet is found not to be that of specified BSL, the packet will be regarded as
illegal and then discarded.
z This parameter can be set to IP address of network segment. In that case the
system will discard IP packets with source IP address not being that of the
segment.
z This parameter can also be set to 0.0.0.0. In that case, no packet will be
discarded.
[Bandwidth control parameter]

By this CAR parameter, the maximal bandwidth for PVC service data transmission is
controlled. Granularity of bandwidth control here being 64 kbit/s, this parameter can be
configured to n*64 kbit/s (0≤n≤32, the bandwidth ranging 0–2 Mbit/s), selected from a
drop-down list. In practice, it can be configured to meet specific requirements.

5-15
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

Caution:

z With IPoA, one PVC connection has one VLAN ID.

z With IPoA, if the specified source IP address is that of IPoA on RTU, it must be consistent with
configurations on RTU and BAS (MA5200 for example).
z With 1483B, a VLAN ID corresponds to 31 1483B connections at most, and at a certain E1 port, a
VLAN ID can be shared maximally by 16 PVC connections.
z The system limits the number of service PVC connections at one E1 port to 31, and therefore one E1
port corresponds to 32 PVC connections maximally, including the inband NMS one which is necessary.
A downstream BSL accommodates 16 ADSL ports at most, and an ADSL port can be configured with
two PVCs. All these PVCs will be distributed to four E1 ports of BSL; therefore it is adequate if one E1
port supports 31 PVCs.
z If a value (1 by default) is configured to be the inband management VALN ID, it cannot be used by
other service PVCs.
z The sum of CAR values of all service connections (except management PVC connection) at one E1
port cannot exceed 2 Mbit/s. The command MOD BTUPVCCAR can be used to modify traffic control
parameters of PVC connection.

II. FPGA Configuration

FPGA logical module is a core module, processing services for BTU. It carries out
adaptation binding of ATM inverse multiplexing and processes IPoA and 1483B
protocols. With FPGA configuration, its service processing mode is set, and its service
processing parameters are managed.
1) Related commands
Command Command function
SET BTUFPGACFG Make configurations for BTU to process services
DSP BTUFPGACFG Display service processing configurations of BTU

2) Parameter descriptions
[NE number]

It is the NE number of the BTU.

[Pause frame dealing]

It indicates whether FPGA processes the PAUSE frame. The default value is “deal”.

[Self-learn mode]

5-16
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

It specifies whether FPGA adopts self-learn mode when processing services. If it

adopts the self-learn mode, FPGA chip will learn the service connection parameters
automatically; if not, the BTU downstream unicast connection table has to be
configured manually. Refer to “Downstream Unicast Connection Management”.The
default value is “enable”.

[CRC dealing]

It indicates whether FPGA conducts CRC check. If it is set to "ENABLE”, FPGA will
conduct CRC check; set to “DISABLE”, it will not. The default value is “ENABLE”.

[Broadcast packet dealing], [Broadcast packet flux control parameter], [Unknown

broadcast packet dealing], [Unknown broadcast packet flux control parameter],
[Management packet flux control parameter]

These parameters are for FPGA to control flux of broadcast packets, unknown packets
and management packets.

[IPOA address binding]

It controls whether FPGA binds the IPoA address when processing packets.

[Device MAC]

It is the MAC address of the 100-Mbit/s VLAN network port which is used by FPGA to
bind protocols. The input format is of six-byte in hex, such as 08003E99999A.

[IPOA source MAC], [IPOA destination 1MAC],[IPOA destination 2MAC]

These parameters are meaningful only when service PVC connection protocol is
IPoA.IPoA source MAC address is MAC address of the network port used by BTU to
create IPoA connection; IPoA destination MAC address is the network port MAC
address of upstream BAS equipment. The two upstream FE interfaces (PORTA and
PORTB) correspond to one MAC address respectively.

III. Downstream Unicast Connection Management

If FPGA service processing is not of self-learn mode, and service PVC connection is of
1483B protocol, the unicast connection parameters of service connection processing
have to be defined manually.
1) Related commands
Command Command function
ADD BTUDNSBLNK Add downstream unicast connection to BTU
DSP BTUDNSBLNK Display downstream unicast connection of BTU
RMV BTUDNSBLNK Delete downstream unicast connection of BTU

5-17
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

2) Parameter descriptions
[NE number]

It is the NE number of the BTU.

[Index]

It is the index of unicast connection, numbered in a certain NE. It cannot be duplicated.

[Port]

It is the port number which the unicast connection is in. It must be consistent with that in
PVC connection table.

[VPI], [VCI]

They should keep consistent with those in PVC connection table. VPI ranges 0–15; VCI
ranges 32–95.

[VLANID]

It should be consistent with that in PVC connection.

[MAC]

This parameter specifies the MAC address of the RTU which connects with the ADSL
port corresponding to PVC. The input format is of six-byte in hex.

Note:
z The port number, VPI/VCI, and VLAN ID in unicast connection table should have corresponding PVC
records in PVC connection table.
z Normally, the downstream unicast connection table is not set manually, since it can be done by setting
FPGA to self-learn mode.
z If the PVC corresponding to unicast connection is bound to IPoA, you do not have to set the
downstream unicast connection table manually.

5.1.6 Loading and Backing Up

The BTU supports online loading, backing up and saving of program and data. All
operations require initiating and setting TFTP server beforehand, with saving data
being the only exception.

The following details procedures for loading, backing up and saving data.

5-18
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

z Program, logic and data can be loaded with services uninterrupted. On loading
program, the BTU applies for loading file cc08.btu at TFTP server; on loading logic,
it applies for loading file fpga.btu at TFTP server; on loading data, it applies for
loading file with specified format (BIN or INI) at TFTP server. With loading
successful, the program, logic and data are written in Flash memory for permanent
storage.
z At that moment, all configuration data exist only in the board memory. If the board
is rebooted or re-powered in that case, the data will be lost. So the data must be
backed up or saved before reboot. Saving data is to write the configuration data in
the memory to the Flash memory for use after reboot. Backing up data is to back
up the configuration data in the memory to TFTP specified directory.
1) Related commands
Command Command function
SET BTULDOPER Refresh loading information of BTU

2) Parameter descriptions
[NE number]

It is the NE number of the BTU which is undergoing loading and backing up, being
mandatory.

[Operation type]

It is the operation type. There are “load program”, “load logic”, “load data”, “save data”
and “back up data” for choice.

When the data are to be loaded or backed up, the file type and file name must be
specified. The file type can only be BIN or INI. The file name can be everything with
suffix “bin” or “ini”, like but.bin (BIN type) or btu.ini (INI type).

Note:
z Refer to chapter 6 “Loading Software” in C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Installation Manual
Volume 2 for configuration of TFTP server program.
z The data to be loaded, backed up or saved must already exist; otherwise TFTP program will fail due to
file unavailability.
z With loading data successful, the system will save the configuration data to the Flash memory
automatically.
z On data loading, if the configuration data in the memory is not consistent with that in the Flash memory,
the system will save data to the Flash memory automatically.
z During loading, backing up or saving, other operations including board reset (RST BTU) cannot be
carried out.

5-19
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

5.1.7 Performance Management

FPGA is a central module of BTU for service processing. Its working status directly
determines overall performance of the board. The system provides a function to make
service processing measurement on FPGA.
1) Related commands
Command Command function
DSP BTUFPGASTAT Display FPGA status of BTU

2) Parameter descriptions
[NE number]

It is the NE number of the BTU which the FPGA to be queried is in, being mandatory.

The command output includes measurements of cells and packets sent and received in
service processing of FPGA.A typical one is shown as follows:

UTP received cells: statistics of ATM cells received at UTOPIA interface

ULP sent cells: statistics of ATM cells sent at UTOPIA interface

MIITXA sent packets: statistics of IPOA/1483B packets sent at interface A of MII

MIITXB sent packets: statistics of IPOA/1483B packets sent at interface B of MII

MIITXA received packets: statistics of IPOA/1483B packets received at interface A of

MII

MIITXB received packets: statistics of IPOA/1483B packets received at interface B of

MII

5.1.8 Alarm Management

The BTU adopts the same alarm management method with the switch. Refer to “Alarm
System” in C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Operation Manual - Routine
Operation Volume.

5-20
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

5.2 Configuring Inband NMS of BSL

I. Introduction

BSL inband management channel is the NMS PVC connection between BTU and BSL,
with PVC protocol being IPoA or 1483B.
z With IPoA, IP address of the inband NMS of BSL, IPoA inband NMS PVC
connection between BSL and BTU, inband NMS route between BSL and NMS
computer and the access control list (ACL) must be configured.
z With 1483B, only port number, VPI and VCI of the inband NMS PVC connection
must be configured.
With either way, IP address of ATM network port on BSL must be configured
beforehand. In that case, a subscriber can obtain the IP address through TELNET and
establish BSL configuration management connection.

Note:
Here are configuration procedures of BSL introduced. For configuration commands, refer to command
manual 31190216-BSL Command Reference.

II. Configurations

1) Configure IP Address of BSL

IP addresses of ATM network ports of BSL and BTU must be in the same network
segment.
2) Configure Inband NMS PVC
E1 port which the NMS PVC of BSL is in must be consistent with that actually
interconnected in the upper BTU. Moreover, configuration of VPI/VCI must keep
consistent with that of downstream inband NMS PVC specified at BTU.
3) Configure System Route
If IP addresses of the NMS computer and the BSL are not in the same network segment,
there has to be a route configured to forward IP packets. All packets are then forwarded
at a specified gateway; otherwise, they will be discarded at the IP layer.

Route configurations include IP address configuration, subnet mask configuration and

gateway configuration. The destination IP address can be the IP address of the NMS
computer or of a network segment. The IP address of the gateway must be in the same
network segment with that of BSL equipment, and in a different one with the destination
IP address. On receiving an IP packet, the BSL checks whether the destination address

5-21
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 5 BTU Board Configuration

of the packet is in the same network segment as that of itself. If not, the BSL will search
in the route table, perform AND to the destination IP address and its subnet mask, find
the gateway for forwarding and regard it as the next hop route.
4) Configure Authorized and Unauthorized Access Ranges
The system supports a network security mechanism, with which it will analyze the
source IP address on receiving an IP packet. If the address is beyond the authorized
range, or within both authorized and unauthorized ranges, the packet will be regarded
as illegal and then discarded. In this way, illegal subscribers through TELNET are kept
away.

Caution:

Refusal has a priority over acceptance. By configuration of inband NMS, be sure to include IP address of
the NMS computer in the authorized table and out of the unauthorized one; otherwise, the system will
regard it as illegal and refuse login of NMS subscribers.

5-22
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples

Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples

6.1 Networking Descriptions

Table 6-1 is the networking diagram of the BTU board.

IP: 10.11.16.152/16

BTU management
R

IP MAN/
Internet
10.11.16.100/16 IP: 172.20.200.200/16
BSL inband 100M
Telnet NMS 10M
LAN MA5200
Switch
C&C08 IP: 192.168.20.2/24
10-Mbit/s switch
netwokr port Active and standby 100M
IP:172.20.31.31/16 communication
VLAN network port
serial ports
IP: 192.168.20.1/24

Configure the
serial port BTU board

ATM network port.

IP: 172.30.31.31/16

SDH
transmission
network

IP: 172.30.1.1/16 IP: 172.30.1.2/16

BSL1 BSL2

RTU1 ... RTU16 RTU17 ... RTU32

Figure 6-1 Networking diagram of the BTU

I. Descriptions of BSL Data

The BTU connects with two BSL boards (BSL1 and BSL2) downstream, each of which
connects with 16 ADSL subscribers respectively.

6-1
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples

z The IP address of BSL1 is 172.30.1.1/16. The four upstream E1 ports correspond

to E1s 1~4 of the 63 E1s of the BTU. The PVC port of the NMS is the first E1 and
the VPI and VCI are respectively 15 and 95.
z The IP address of BSL2 is 172.30.1.2/16. Only two of the four upstream E1 ports
are in use, connecting to E1s 62 and 63 of the 63 E1s of the BTU respectively. The
PVC port of the NMS is the 63rd E1 and the VPI and VCI are respectively 15 and
95.
z RTU1–RTU32 use Internet Protocols over ATM (IPoA), with the IPoA address
being 192.168.20.3~34.

II. Descriptions of BTU Data

The IP address of the ATM network port connecting with downstream equipment is
172.30.31.31/16; the IP address of the 10-Mbit/s network port connecting with the NMS
computer is 172.20.31.31/16; the IP address of the 100-Mbit/s VLAN network port
connecting with the upstream board access server (BAS) equipment is
192.168.20.1/24; the default gateway IP address is 192.168.20.2, the IP address of the
MA5200 interface. The downstream equipment adopts IPoA as the inband
management channel protocol; the BTU uses outband channel for management, with
the NMS channel being Ethernet (default value).

The BTU adopts IPoA for service PVC connection with the BSL, and connects with the
MA5200 through the first FE interface. The E1s 1–4 of the BTU connect with BSL1 (its
IP address being 172.30.1.1). Each port connects with four PVCs. The E1s 62 and 63
connect with BSL2 (its IP address being 172.30.1.2). Each port connects with eight
PVCs. Table 6-1 shows the connection parameters of 32 service PVCs.

Table 6-1 Connection parameters of 32 service PVCs

PVC connection
E1 port number VPI/VCI VLAN ID Bandwidth
index
1–4 0 0–32/0–35 0, 2–4 512 kbit/s
5–8 1 0–32/0–35 5–8 512 kbit/s
9–12 2 0–32/0–35 9–12 512 kbit/s
13–16 3 0–32/0–35 13–16 512 kbit/s
17–24 62 0–32/0–39 17–24 256 kbit/s
25–32 63 0–32/0–39 25–32 256 kbit/s

Note:
Being the inband NMS of the system by default, the VLAN ID 1 cannot be used as an inband VLAN of
service PVC.

6-2
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples

Table 6-2 shows FPGA configurations of the BTU.

Table 6-2 FPGA configurations

Configuration item Configuration parameter

Processing flag of the PAUSE frame Process
Learning mode Learning
CRC processing flag Enable
Traffic control parameter of broadcast packet 32960
Traffic control parameter of unknown 32960
broadcast packet
Traffic control parameter of management 64
packet
MAC address of equipment 08-00-3E-99-99-9A
Source MAC address of IPOA 08-00-3E-99-99-9A
Destination MAC1 and MAC2 addresses of Port A: 08-00-3E-99-99-9B
IPOA Port B: 08-00-3E-99-99-9C

III. Configuring MA5200 Data

The IP address of the network port on MA5200, the upstream BAS equipment, is
192.168.20.2/24, consistent with the default gateway IP address of the BTU for
transferring IP packets.

IV. Configuring NMS Data at BAM

The back administration module (BAM), with its IP address of 172.20.200.200/16, and
the workstation (with client software) manage configuration of the BTU. The BAM is
configured with TFTP/BOOTP Server, whose default NMS IP address is
172.20.200.200. The IP address of the TFTP server is also set to 172.20.200.200,
identical with that of the BAM. The IP address of the network card in the BAM which
connects with the workstation is 10.11.16.152/16, while that in the workstation is
10.11.16.100/16. The configuration of the BSL inband NMS through TELNET is
conducted at the workstation, where the BTU startup parameters can also be
configured through a serial port.

The following details the BTU service configuration and BSL inband NMS configuration.

6-3
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples

6.2 Configurations

6.2.1 Configuring BTU

The mandatory configurations of the BTU include NE (network element) configuration,

downstream equipment registration, route configuration, NMS configuration and
service PVC configuration. The following explains them one by one.

I. Configuring NE

Add an NE: The IP address of the 10-Mbit/s network port is 172.20.31.31. The NE
number is allocated automatically. Resume there is no other NEs in the system and the
number allocated here is 0.

ADD NE: NT=_BTU, IP="172.20.31.31";

II. Configuring Downstream Equipment

Use the following commands to add downstream BSL equipment registries.

ADD BTUDNDEV: NE=0, PORT=1, TYPE=BSL, PORT1=1, PORT2=2, PORT3=3,

PORT4=4, IP="172.30.1.1";

ADD BTUDNDEV: NE=0, PORT=63, TYPE=BSL, PORT1=62, PORT2=63, PORT3=0,

PORT4=0, IP="172.30.1.2";

Caution:

z The E1 port number of the downstream equipment NMS of the BTU must be identical with that
configured at the BSL.
z The E1 port number of downstream BSL NMS must be one of the four BTU E1 port numbers actually
connected; otherwise, the addition of downstream equipment will fail.

III. Configuring Route

In communication between downstream BSL equipment and TELNET NMS computer,

the IP packets from the BSL will be transferred to the NMS computer through the BTU.
However, the BTU must be added with a route because the default gateway of the BTU
cannot fulfill the task alone.

6-4
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples

The destination address of the route is the IP address of the TELNET computer, and
the next hop IP address (gateway IP address) is the IP address of the network port on
the BAM connecting with the BTU. The command is as follows:

ADD BTUROUTE: NE=0, IDX=1, DSTIP="10.11.0.0", MSK="255.255.0.0",

GTWIP="172.20.200.200";

IV. Configuring NMS of BTU

z Configure 10-Mbit/s network port.

SET BTUNMSCFG: NE=0, CFGC=C1, IP1="172.20.31.31", IPM1="255.255.0.0";
z Configure VLAN network port.
SET BTUNMSCFG: NE=0, CFGC=C2, IP2="192.168.20.1", IPM2="255.255.255.0";
z Configure ATM network port.
SET BTUNMSCFG: NE=0, CFGC=C3, IP3="172.30.31.31", IPM3="255.255.0.0";
z Configure IP address of the default gateway.
SET BTUNMSCFG: NE=0, CFGC=C4, IP4="192.168.20.2";
z Configure IP address of the default NMS.
SET BTUNMSCFG: NE=0, CFGC=C5, IP5="172.20.200.200";
z Configure IP address of the TFTP server.
SET BTUNMSCFG: NE=0, CFGC=C6, IP6="172.20.200.200";
z Configure inband NMS.
SET BTUNMSCFG: NE=0, CFGC=C7, DNPR=IPOA, VLAN=1, M2=PORT0;
z Configure downstream inband PVC.
SET BTUNMSCFG: NE=0, CFGC=C8, PORT=1, VPI=15, VCI=95;

SET BTUNMSCFG: NE=0, CFGC=C8, PORT=63, VPI=15, VCI=95;

z Configure NMS channel.
SET BTUNMSCFG: NE=0, CFGC=C9, NMSC=ETHERNET;

6-5
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples

Caution:

z Normally, the IP address of the 10-Mbit/s network port has been configured through a serial port and
any modification of that will lead to communication breakup between the management program and
the BTU. If there is a breakup, the command MOD NE can be used to modify the NE address.
z The IP address of the ATM network port must be in the same network segment with that of the
downstream BSL.
z Because there is a downstream equipment registered, the network segment address of the ATM
network port on the BTU cannot be modified.

V. Configuring Service PVC

Use the following command to add 32 PVCs.

ADD BTUPVCLNK: NE=0, IDX=1, PORT=0, VPI=0, VCI=32, VLAN=0, MII=PORTA,

TYPE=IPOA, SRCIP="192.168.20.3", BANDCTRL=B8, BURSTCTRL=1000;

ADD BTUPVCLNK: NE=0, IDX=2, PORT=0, VPI=0, VCI=33, VLAN=2, MII=PORTA,

TYPE=IPOA, SRCIP="192.168.20.4", BANDCTRL=B8, BURSTCTRL=1000;

ADD BTUPVCLNK: NE=0, IDX=3, PORT=0, VPI=0, VCI=34, VLAN=3, MII=PORTA,

TYPE=IPOA, SRCIP="192.168.20.5", BANDCTRL=B8, BURSTCTRL=1000;

ADD BTUPVCLNK: NE=0, IDX=4, PORT=0, VPI=0, VCI=35, VLAN=4, MII=PORTA,

TYPE=IPOA, SRCIP="192.168.20.6", BANDCTRL=B8, BURSTCTRL=1000;

ADD BTUPVCLNK: NE=0, IDX=5, PORT=1, VPI=0, VCI=32, VLAN=5, MII=PORTA,

TYPE=IPOA, SRCIP="192.168.20.7", BANDCTRL=B8, BURSTCTRL=1000;

………………

ADD BTUPVCLNK: NE=0, IDX=16, PORT=4, VPI=0, VCI=35, VLAN=16, MII=PORTA,

TYPE=IPOA, SRCIP="192.168.20.18", BANDCTRL=B8, BURSTCTRL=1000;

ADD BTUPVCLNK: NE=0, IDX=17, PORT=62, VPI=0, VCI=32, VLAN=17, MII=PORTA,

TYPE=IPOA, SRCIP="192.168.20.19", BANDCTRL=B4, BURSTCTRL=1000;

………………

ADD BTUPVCLNK: NE=0, IDX=32, PORT=63, VPI=0, VCI=39, VLAN=32, MII=PORTA,

TYPE=IPOA, SRCIP="192.168.20.34", BANDCTRL=B4, BURSTCTRL=1000;

6-6
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples

Note:
z The downstream BSL equipment does not support the traffic control function, which is therefore
realized at the BTU.
z With the bandwidth control parameter being B8, the bandwidth is 512 kbit/s (8*64 kbit/s); with the
bandwidth control parameter being B4, the bandwidth is 256 kbit/s (4*64 kbit/s).

VI. Configuring FPGA

Use the following command to configure FPGA.

SET BTUFPGACFG: NE=0, PD=DEAL, SL=YES, CRCF=ENABLE, BFP=32960,

UBFP=32960, MFP=64, DEVMAC="08013E99999A", SMAC="08013E99999A",
DMAC0="08003E99999B", DMAC1="08003E99999C";

VII. Saving and Backing Up Data.

After the data is configured, it must be saved or backed up so that it will be still valid
after reroot of the BTU.

Use the following command to save data to the Flash memory of the BTU.

SET BTULDOPER: NE=0, OPER=SD;

Use the following command to save data to the TFTP server directory, with the file
name being btu.ini.

SET BTULDOPER: NE=0, OPER=BD, DT=INI, FNAME="btu.ini";

Note:
To back up data, the TFTP program must be started and configured.

6.2.2 Configuring Inband NMS of BSL

When the BTU is configured, the BSL must be configured as follows to establish a
channel for the inband NMS of the BSL. Before the establishment of the inband NMS
channel, the following configurations have to be made through a serial port.

I. Configuring IP Address

Configure the IP address of the ATM network port on the BSL.

6-7
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples

z Configure BSL1.
BSL(config)#atmlan atm ip-address
<ip>:172.30.1.1
<mask>:255.255.0.0
[<gateway>]:
Set successfully.
z Configure BSL2.
BSL(config)#atmlan atm ip-address
<ip>:172.30.1.2
<mask>:255.255.0.0
[<gateway>]:
Set successfully.

II. Configuring Inband NMS PVC

Configure the PVC of the inband NMS to adopt IPoA protocol. The VPI and VCI are
consistent with those in the BTU, being 15 and 95 respectively.
z Configure BSL1.
BSL(config)#pvc nms
{IPoA,1483b}:IPoA
<ip>:172.30.31.31
{adsl,atm,nms}:atm
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(0)/(1-4)}:0/0/1
{<vpi>}{0-15}:15
{<vci>}{0-511}:95
<Rx-cttr>{1-2}:1
<tx-cttr>{1-2}:1
Add NMS PVC successfully, CID = 1.
z Configure BSL2.
BSL(config)#pvc nms
{IPoA,1483b}:IPoA
<ip>:172.30.31.31
{adsl,atm,nms}:atm
<FrameId/SlotId/PortId>{(0)/(0)/(1-4)}:0/0/2
{<vpi>}{0-15}:15
{<vci>}{0-511}:95
<Rx-cttr>{1-2}:1
<tx-cttr>{1-2}:1
Add NMS PVC successfully, CID = 1.

6-8
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples

Caution:

The BSL supports only one PVC for the NMS; therefore the existing PVC must be deleted to make the
configuration successful.

III. Configuring Default Route

Configure the default gateway IP address of the BSL to that of the ATM network port of
the BTU. Set BSL1 and BSL2 to the identical value.

BSL(config)#atmlan ip-route
<ip-addr>:0.0.0.0
<netmask>:0.0.0.0
<gateway>:172.30.31.31
Add route successfully.

IV. Configuring Network Security

Configure the IP address ranges authorized and unauthorized to access the network.
Set BSL1 and BSL2 to the identical value.
z Configure the IP address range authorized to access the network.
BSL(config)#atmlan ip-access
<start-ip>:10.11.16.1
<end-ip>:10.11.16.255
<mask>:255.255.0.0
Add acceptable IP address successfully.
z Configure the IP address range unauthorized to access the network.
BSL(config)#atmlan ip-refuse
<start-ip>:172.20.200.152
<end-ip>:172.20.200.152
<mask>:255.255.0.0
Add refused IP address successfully.

V. Configuring NMS Terminal

After configuration of the inband NMS of the BSL, you need to add a route to the
TELNET terminal and BAM respectively if no route to the BSL exists on the TELNET
NMS terminal.

On the TELNET terminal, configure the destination IP address to 172.30.0.0, the IP

address of the BSL network segment, and the next hop gateway address to

6-9
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples

10.11.16.152, the IP address of the network card on the BAM which connects to the
TELNET terminal. The command is as follows:

route add 172.30.0.0 255.255.0.0 10.11.16.152

In order for the BAM to forward IP packets, use the following command to add a route to
the BSL.

route add 172.30.0.0 255.255.0.0 172.20.31.31

In addition, the IP packets forwarding function of the Windows NT operating system

should be enabled. Proceed as follows:
1) Under the path [Start/Settings/Control Panel/Network], select the tab “Protocols”,
as shown in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2 TCP/IP properties selection page

2) Select “TCP/IP Protocol”, and click <Properties> to display the [Microsoft TCP/IP
Properties] dialog box. Select the “Routing” tab and be sure the item “Enable IP
Forwarding” is checked. See Figure 6-3.

6-10
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Chapter 6 BTU Configuration Examples

Figure 6-3 TCP/IP route properties selection page

After these configurations, the TELNET NMS terminal of the BSL can manage and
configure the BSL through the inband NMS channel.

6-11
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations

Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations

A
AM Administration Module
AMD Alarm Drive Board
AN Access Network
ASL Analog Subscriber Line Board
B
BAM Back Administration Module
BCC Bearer Channel Connection
BCD Binary Coded Decimal
BRA Basic Rate Access
C
CAS Channel Associated Signaling
CCB Communication Control database
CCF Call Control Function
CCM Communication Control Module
CCS7 Common Channel Signaling No.7
CDB Central DatabBase
CFB Call Forwarding Busy
CKM Clock Module
CKV Clock Drive Board
CLI Calling Line Identification
CLIP Calling Line Identity Presentation
CM Communication Module
CNET Central Switching Network Board
CPC Central Processing Unit
CPM Central Processor Module
CPU Central Processing Unit
D
DCN Digital Console
DDI Direct-Dialing-In

A-1
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations

DID Direct Inward Dialing

DIN Decode Interface
DP Detection Point
DPC Destination (Signaling) Point Code
DRV Dual Tone Number Receiving & Drive Board
DS DSS1 Signaling
DSL Digital Subscriber Line
DSP Destination Signaling Point
DSS1 Digital Subscriber Signaling No.1
DT Digital Trunk
DTF Digital Trunk Board
DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency
DTR Dual Tone Transmit/Receive Board
E
EF Envelope Function
EMA Emergency Action Board
ET16 16-Channel E1/T1 Interface Board
F
FEP Front End Processor
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
G
GT Global Title
GUI Graphic User Interface
H
HDLC High-level Data Link Control
HLR Home Location Register
HW Highway
I
ID IDentification
IDT Inner Digital Trunk board
IN Intelligent Network
INAP Intelligent Network Application Protocol
INSM Intelligent Switching Module
IP Internet Protocol

A-2
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network

ISP Internet Service Provider
ISUP ISDN User Part
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication
ITU-T
Standardization Sector
L
LAP Link Access Protocol Board
LE Local Exchange
LIM Line Interface Module
LPN7 Common Channel Signaling Processing Board
LPV5 V5 Protocol Processing Board
M
MEM Memory Board
MFC Multi-Frequency Compelled Board
MHI Multi-HW Interface Board
MMI Man Machine Interface
MML Man Machine Language
MPU Universal Main Control Board
MSC Main Switching Center
MTP Message Transfer Part
N
NET NET Card
NOD Node Communication Board
NP Number Portability
O
OBC 40M Optic Interface Board
P
PBX Private Branch Exchange
PCM Pulse Code Modulation
PRA Primary Rate Access
PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network
PWS Secondary Power Supply Board
Q
QSI High-speed Signal Interface Board

A-3
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations

R
RDT Remote Digital Trunk
RSM Remote Switching Module
S
SAU Signaling Access Unit
SCCP Signaling Connection Control Part
SCF Service Control Function
SCMG SCCP Management
SCP Service Control Point
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SIG Signal Tone Board
SM Switching Module
SMAP Service Management Access Point
SMCP Service Management Control Point
SPC Service Processing Board
SPD Special Tone Board
SPM Service Processing Module
SPT Special Voice Board
SRC Resources Sharing Board
SRF Service Resource Function
SRM Specialized Resource Module
SSAP Source Service Access Point
SSF Service Switching Function
SSP Service Switching Point
ST Subscriber Terminal
STU SDH Photoelectric Interface Board
T
TCAP Transaction Capabilities Application Part
TDP Trigger Detection Point
TP Terminal Portability
TUP Telephone User Part
V
V5TK V5 Trunk Processing Board
W

A-4
Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations

WT Wiring Trough

A-5
 Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Index

Index

A PRA subscriber, 2-6

PVC connection, 5-13
active C-channel, 1-2
resource searching sequence, 3-19

B route configuration, 5-8

SCCP DPC, 3-12
B-channel, 2-1
SCCP subsystem, 3-13
SCP, 3-10
C
SCP physical address, 3-11
cautions
SM PCM attribute, 2-13
PRA data configuration, 2-3
SM PRA link, 2-7
V5 data configuration, 1-4
SM PRA trunk circuit, 2-12
commands
SM PRA trunk group, 2-9
access code, 3-7
SM V5 channel, 1-14
authorized NMS, 5-12
SM V5 trunk circuit, 1-8
BTU clock, 5-4
SM V5-interface, 1-10
BTU operation, 5-6
SPM PRA link, 2-8
BTU SDH, 5-4
SPM PRA trunk circuit, 2-12
charging category, 3-20
SPM PRA trunk group, 2-11
charging property, 3-22
SPM V5 channel, 1-14
charging rounding, 3-21
SPM V5 trunk, 1-9
conversation duration discount, 3-24
SPM V5-interface, 1-13
daily tariff discount, 3-24
SPT start voice code, 3-18
downstream equipment, 5-7
SPT voice code, 3-17
downstream unicast connection, 5-17
SSP physical address, 3-12
FPGA connection, 5-15
SSP SRF, 3-17
GT code, 3-14
TDP, 3-8
holiday tariff discount, 3-23
telephone number continuum project, 3-25
IN caller information, 3-26
V5 digital user, 1-17
IN service constraint relationship, 3-9
V5 ordinary user, 1-16
ISDN data, 2-5
V5 PRA trunk group, 2-11
MEM, 3-27
V5 trunk group, 1-7
MEM information, 3-25
V5 variable, 1-15
NE configuration, 5-2
weekday tariff discount, 3-23
NEW GT code, 3-16
C-path, 1-1
NMS configuration, 5-9
PCM attribute addition, 1-7 D
PCM of SPM E1, 2-13
D-channel, 2-1
performance management, 5-19
DSS1, 2-1

i-1
 Operation Manual – Services & Examples Volume
C&C08 Digital SPC Switching System Index

E PRA data relationship, 2-2

primary link, 1-2
examples
principles
adding a V5-Interface, 1-33
BTU configuration, 5-1
adding PRA trunk, 2-33
C-channel configuration, 1-3
adding SM V5 DSL users, 1-18
DP data, 3-2
adding SPM V5 users, 1-25
IN charging data, 3-3
BTU configuration, 1
INAP link, 3-4
configuring IN data, 3-28
PCM port configuration, 2-3
configuring INAP signaling link data, 3-37
physical C-channel, 1-4
configuring intelligent card service, 3-42
PRA subscriber configuration, 2-3
configuring NP incoming call service, 3-50
PRA trunk configuration, 2-2
configuring NP outgoing call service, 3-53
primary and secondary links, 1-4
configuring SM PRA trunk, 2-14
resource data, 3-3
configuring SPM PRA trunk, 2-22
SCCP data, 3-3
deleting a V5-Interface, 1-38
SCP data, 3-3
modify PRA subscriber number, 2-47
system parameters, 3-4
modifying charging data, 3-46
protection group 1, 1-2
modifying PRA trunk, 2-39
protection group 2, 1-2
removing PRA trunk, 2-44

I S
secondary link, 1-2
IN data relationship, 3-2
standby C-channel, 1-2

L
V
Layer 3 protocols, 1-1
V5 data relationship, 1-2
logical C-channel, 1-2
V5.1-interface, 1-1

P V5.2-interface, 1-1
physical C-channel, 1-2

i.

i-2